You are on page 1of 222

India Page 1 of 222

India
Purpose
This country version is designed for use by businesses with operations in India. As well as the generic SAP
system functions, it comprises functions designed for laws and business practices particular to India, and a
country template to help you customize the system according to local requirements.
This documentation explains how the country-specific functions work and what Customizing settings are made by
the country template. It does not cover the generic functions, which are described in the rest of the SAP Library.

Features
Country-Specific Functions
Most of the country-specific functions for India relate to Financials and Logistics. The main areas are as follows:
• Excise duty and the central value-added tax system (CENVAT)
• Withholding tax (also known as tax deducted at source)
• Sales tax
• Maintenance and printing of statutory excise registers
All of the menu paths given in this document are based on the India Localization role, with the exception of
functions in withholding tax, whose menu paths are given from the SAP Easy Access menu.
Country Template
To allow you to customize your Indian company codes more quickly, you can use the Indian country template in the
Country Installation Program.

Financial Accounting (FI)


Purpose
The Financial Accounting (FI) component covers the most important laws and business practices specific to India.
The following documentation describes these aspects of the component.

Features
Country-Specific Functions
Country Version India comes with a large number of additional functions for withholding taxes. The customer and
vendor masters have been enhanced to store data only used in India. An extra report is also provided for
depreciating assets according to the Income Tax Act.
Country Template
The country template for India comes with:
• Sample settings for calculating and posting taxes
• A chart of accounts and financial statement version
• Sample settings for asset depreciation

Taxes (FI-AP/AR)
Purpose
The Taxes component covers the most important laws and business practices specific to India. The following
documentation describes these aspects of the component. For generic information about Taxes, see Taxes (FI-
AP/AR).

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 2 of 222

Features
Country-Specific Functions
Country Version India uses the standard functions for calculating and collecting withholding taxes. However, both
Classic Withholding Tax and Extended Withholding Tax come with additional functions for tax remittance, journal
vouchers, creating withholding tax certificates, and preparing annual returns.
If you want to handle excise duties, you must post the excisable transactions using the Materials Management
(MM) and Sales and Distribution (SD) components. The system calculates the excise duty in these components
and creates the appropriate line items in Financial Accounting (FI). However, if you only want to handle withholding
taxes, you can use FI on its own.
Country Template
The country template for India comes with settings for calculating and posting withholding taxes, and account
determination settings for posting excise duty.

Excise Duty
Use
The SAP system automatically calculates excise duties in Materials Management (MM) and in Sales and
Distribution (SD), and posts them in Financial Accounting (FI).
The system covers all types of excise duty, all of which need to be calculated and reported separately:
• Basic excise duty (BED)
• Special excise duty (SED)
• Additional excise duty (AED)
• National calamity contingency duty (NCCD)
• Cess
• Education cess
• Countervailing duty
• Additional duty of customs

Features
The system of excise duties is complex, and differs from the generic functions for taxes on sales and purchases in
a number of ways:
• The rate of duty on a single material can vary according to which chapter ID it is listed under.
• You cannot offset all excise duty on inputs against outputs.

Depots cannot offset any input duties at all. Manufacturing plants can only offset input duties if they can
show that the input materials are used to produce output materials.

• You have to record all excise duty (inputs and outputs) in excise registers.
• Your company may only be entitled to offset a portion of the duty on inputs against duty on outputs.
• Companies that qualify as small-scale industries can levy excise duty on outputs at reduced rates, so if you
purchase materials from these companies, you must calculate a different rate of excise duty.
Excise Determination
MM comes with two ways of determining excise duties (and sales taxes) on input materials: formula-based excise
determination and condition-based excise determination. The system calculates excise duties using a tax
procedure.
SD also supports formula-based and condition-based excise determination, but in SD, the system calculates the
taxes using a pricing procedure, not the tax procedure (see Pricing).
Reporting

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 3 of 222

You have to remit the excise duty that you have collected to the central excise authorities. The law requires you to
remit excise duty twice monthly: for the first half of any given month (1–15 inclusive) and from 16 to month-end. In
each case, you are allowed five days to remit the excise duty. Country Version India offers a report to help you do
just that (see Remittance of Excise Duty Fortnightly).
A small number of transactions have to be remitted on the same day (see Other Outward Movements).
In addition, the system allows you to prepare printouts of the various excise registers for the tax authorities.

Partial CENVAT Credit


Use
In some industries, businesses are only allowed to set off a portion of their input excise duty against output duty. In
this case, the remainder of the duty is added to the material value.

Activities

Customizing

If any of your excise registrations are only entitled to claim partial CENVAT credit, set the indicator in Customizing
for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Maintain Excise
Registrations.

Configure separate tax codes that split the excise and post some as tax and add the rest to the material price.

Day-to-Day Activities

The portion of the excise duty that is added to the material value is displayed in the excise invoice, along with the
CENVAT credit. This amount is added to the inventory value when you post the goods receipt.

Remittance of Excise Duty Fortnightly


Use
You use this report to calculate how much excise duty you must remit to the authorities. Legislation requires you to
remit excise duty twice monthly: for all the goods issues in the first half of any given month (1–15 inclusive) and
from 16 to month-end. In each case, you are allowed five days to remit the excise duty.
Once the report has determined how much you have to pay, it allows you to specify where the money should be
paid from – whether it should be deducted from the CENVAT credits that you have accumulated, or whether it
should be deducted from the personal ledger account (PLA).
Irrespective of which date you execute the report on, you can only utilize CENVAT credits posted up until the 15th
or the last day of the month as the case may be.

Prerequisites
You have:
• Customized the system so that when you create an excise invoice for a sale, the system automatically
debits the excise to a CENVAT clearing account
• Made the settings in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements →
India → Business Transactions → Utilization

Features
To access the report, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements →
Fortnightly Payment.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 4 of 222

Selection
On the selection screen, enter data as required:
• Organizational data (in the General data group box)
• Posting date for the CENVAT payment, if it is different from the run date
• The period to be covered by the report (for example, 1–15 January)

If, for any reason, you want to select an excise invoice individually, you can do so. Any entry in the
Period field will be disregarded.

To display a list of all the excise invoices whose excise duty you have not yet remitted, choose Display
pend. invoices.

To display a list of only the excise invoices for a given period, enter the period in the Period fields,
select Select pending inv. for period, and choose Display pend. invoices. You can also print the list
of pending invoices.

To display the last date when tax was remitted, choose Display last util. date (Display last utilization
date).

Output
For each sort of excise duty, the system shows you:
• How much you have to remit (Amounts payable group box)
• How much credit you have at your disposal on the appropriate CENVAT account (Available balances)

This figure is equal to the credits on the CENVAT account less the minimum balance.

• How much credit you have on the CENVAT accounts (G/L account balances)
You now have to specify which accounts can be used to utilize the duty amount. In the Balance Utilization group
box, the system proposes how much money should be taken from which accounts. You can overwrite these fields if
you want, and choose to refresh the display.
For a list of excise invoices that are considered for the CENVAT payment, choose Display excise invoices. You can
print the list and use it as an annexure.
When you have finished, save your entries. The system then:
• Creates an accounting document that:

{ Credits the CENVAT clearing account to remove the excise duty owed

{ Debits the accounts from which the excise duty is to be paid

• Updates the Updates the Part II register

Value Added Tax (VAT)


Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 5 of 222

In India, VAT has been levied in certain states from April 1, 2005. VAT is levied instead of the Local Sales Tax
(LST). VAT also replaces other taxes such as, turnover tax, surcharge, additional surcharge.

Prerequisites
You can configure the following tax procedures:
• For Condition-Based Excise Determination, configure the tax procedure TAXINN. For more information
about TAXINN, see Configuration of Tax Calculation Procedure TAXINN.
• For Formula-Based Excise Determination, configure the tax procedure TAXINJ. For more information about
TAXINJ, see Configuration of Tax Calculation Procedure TAXINJ.

Features
The essence of VAT is that you can set off the input tax against the tax paid earlier. VAT is based on the value
addition to the goods, and your VAT liability is calculated by deducting input tax credit from tax collected on sales
during the payment period (say, a month).

You have purchased input worth INR 1,00,000 and your sales are worth INR 2,00,000 in a month, and
input tax rate and output tax rate are 4% and 10% respectively, then input tax credit/set-off and
calculation of VAT will be as follows:

● Input purchased within the month = INR 1,00,000

● Output sold in the month = INR 2,00,000

● Input tax paid = INR 4,000

● Output tax payable = INR 20,000

● VAT payable during the month after set-off/input tax credit = INR (20,000
– 4,000) = INR 16,000

The excise invoice that you capture contains one of the following:
● VAT Number – If your buyer belongs to a state where VAT is levied, VAT Number has to be printed on the
excise invoice.
● Bill of Sale Number - If your buyer belongs to a state where VAT is not levied, Bill of Sales Number has to be
printed on the excise invoice.
During billing, the system generates the VAT number if the VAT Registration number is maintained in customer
master in the Tax Code 2 field. Else, the system generates a Bill of Sale number.
These numbers have to printed serially and separately for Bill of Sale, VAT invoice, credit and debit notes. You can
do this using the Official Document Numbering.

Configuration for Official Document Numbering


Purpose
Official Document Numbering is used to to print the numbers serially and separately for Bill of Sale (BOS), Value
Added Tax (VAT) invoice, credit and debit notes.

Process Flow
To configure the Official Document Numbering for India, execute the following activities in the IMG under Cross-
Application Components → General Application Functions → Cross-Application Document Numbering → Taiwan.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 6 of 222

Define Business Places for different plants.

Assign Business Place to Sales Office.

Maintain different document classes to generate different number ranges, for example, B for Bill of Sale,
V for VAT Invoice.

Assign the document class for the VAT and BOS to the Document Type.

Maintain the Number Group.

Maintain the Number Ranges for the Number Group.

Assign the Number Range to a combination of Business place, Document Class and Number Group.

Service Tax
Use
This is a tax that is levied on the services rendered. It is applied on the total price of the service.

Prerequisites
In addition to the standard Implementation Guide (IMG) settings for taxes on service tax, you must also have
maintained the tax registration numbers of your vendors, customers and your own plants.

If there are multiple tax registration numbers, you should have separate account postings to different
General Ledger Accounts based on service registration number. You can do this provided you have
maintained a separate tax code for each service registration number. To do this, for every service
registration number, you should define separate General Ledger Accounts for service tax and
education cess on service tax.

Features
Service tax has the following features:
• It is charged at 12% on the price of the service rendered.
• An education cess of 2% is applicable on the service tax.
• This is a deferred tax. Only the amount of service tax that is actually received (credits) by the customer can
be offset against the tax payable.

The interim General Ledger Account contains the total service tax that you have to receive. The final
General Ledger Account contains only the actual amount that you have received. You can take credit
for only the amount in the final General Ledger Account.

• Service tax can be used to set off excise duty paid by you. Additional duty of customs cannot be used to set
off the service tax paid by you.
• This tax is payable to the Central Government.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 7 of 222

Example
The price of the service is INR 10,000.
Service tax that is applicable is INR 1,200.
Education cess is INR 24.
Total amount to be received by you is INR 11,224. The system updates the interim General Ledger Account with
this amount.
Now, assume that the customer makes a part payment, out of which INR 500 is against service tax. You have to
manually update the final General Ledger Account with this amount.
You can offset only INR 500 against the payables in that month.

Sales Tax
Use
This is a tax levied on the sale of a product. It is applied on the gross price of goods, inclusive of excise duty.

Prerequisites
In addition to the standard Implementation Guide (IMG) settings for taxes on sales and purchases, you must also
have maintained the tax registration numbers of your vendors, customers, and your own plants.
Furthermore, if the state legislation allows you to offset input local sales tax (LST) against output LST, you must
also have defined this (see Material Master (Excise Data)).

Features
There are two types of sales tax. Interstate sales (for example, between Karnataka and Tamil Nadu) are subject to
central sales tax (CST). The tax rate is the same throughout the country. Intrastate sales, on the other hand, are
subject to local sales tax (LST), which differ from state to state. The system handles these using tax jurisdiction
codes.
A percentage of input LST can be deducted against output LST, depending on what percentage of goods you have
purchased in the state in question.
The system calculates the sales taxes automatically, when you enter the tax codes. A report is also available that
tells you how much sales tax you have paid and collected.

Sales Tax Register


Use
You use this report to see how much tax has been accumulated under the various tax codes and tax jurisdiction
codes for a combination of conditions.
You can also report how much input sales tax has been set off against the outputs. This report also can serve as
the basis of determining your local sales volume and central sales volume.

Features
To access the report, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Registers → Sales Tax → Sales
Tax Register.
Selection
On the selection screen, fill out the following data:
• Organizational data
• General selections

Specify which documents you want the report to cover. If you need more selection criteria, use the
dynamic selection fields.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 8 of 222

• General selection

Specify which taxes you want the report to cover. You can report either central sales tax or local sales tax
by choosing a combination of ship-from and ship-to locations.

If you want to restrict the selection to specific locations, fill out the Ship-from and Ship-to fields.

Withholding Tax
Use
Country Version India comes ready configured with all the settings you need to track and remit withholding taxes
under the following sections of the Income Tax Act, 1961:
• Payments to contractors and subcontractors (Section 194 C)
• Insurance commission (Section 194 D)
• Rent (Section 194 I)
• Fees for professional or technical services (Section 194 J)
• Interest other than interest on securities (Section 194 A) (only supported in the Extended Withholding Tax
solution)

Features
Country Version India offers you two solutions for handling withholding tax (also known as tax deducted at source
or TDS). You can either use the Classic Withholding Tax solution or the Extended Withholding Tax solution.

If you are installing the SAP system for the first time, we recommend that you use the Extended
Withholding Tax solution. Before you decide one way or the other, however, you must give careful
consideration as to whether Extended Withholding Tax covers your requirements. If you start working
with this solution and it transpires that it does not cover your needs, SAP does not offer a strategy for
migrating to Withholding Tax.

Taxes withheld under each section are treated differently with regard to the time limits for remitting tax to the
authorities, providing the taxpayer with a withholding tax certificate, and filing an annual return. In addition, the
formats for the withholding tax certificates and the returns also differ.
The Income Tax Act requires you to calculate taxes as soon as you enter an invoice. However, if you make a down
payment to a vendor before you have received an invoice from it, you withhold tax on the down payment. Then,
once the invoice arrives, you clear the down payment against it.
When you prepare your annual returns, the act also requires you to make provisions for taxes on services received
but not yet invoiced.
Country Version India
Country Version India complements the generic Classic Withholding Tax and Extended Withholding Tax solutions
with additional functions that meet the needs of the Income Tax Act. These functions allow you to:
• Ensure that you remit taxes within the due date
• Track and report withholding tax surcharges separately
• Adjust withholding taxes when you clear a down payment against an invoice
• Prepare withholding tax certificates and annual returns
• Calculate withholding tax on provisions

Classic Withholding Tax

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 9 of 222

Use
Under the terms of the Income Tax Act, you are required to calculate withholding tax (tax deducted at source, or
TDS) when you post a vendor invoice. The system calculates withholding tax at the time of payment. To handle
this difference in the calculation of the tax and to incorporate additional requirements, such as withholding tax
certificate printing and annual returns, additional functions are provided.

Features
The withholding tax for an invoice or a down payment is calculated at header level. That is, only one withholding
tax code can be used for a down payment or invoice. This implies that an invoice cannot contain items with
different withholding tax rates. It can, however, contain one or more items with the same withholding tax rate and
one or more items with no withholding tax. This can be handled by specifying the base amount on which
withholding tax is to be calculated. On account of calculation at header level, companies have to instruct their
suppliers not to include items with different withholding tax rates in a single invoice, but issue separate invoices for
different tax rates.
The system also allows you to print TDS certificates for vendors, and to reprint or cancel them if necessary. In
addition, you can also prepare TDS returns.

Recipient Type
Definition
A system object that you use to classify payment recipients as legal persons or natural persons, for the purposes of
withholding tax reporting.

Use

Customizing

Define the recipient types in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial Accounting Global
Settings → Withholding Tax → Withholding Tax → Basic Settings → Maintain Types of Recipient.

Create two entries as follows:

Recipient type Text

CO Companies

OT Others

Master Data

When you enter the withholding tax types and codes in the vendor master, enter CO or OT in the Recipient Type
field, depending on whether the vendor is a legal person or a natural person.

Reporting

The annual returns separate the information about taxes withheld on legal persons and on natural persons.

Calculate Tax Deducted at Source

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 10 of 222

Use
You use this program to calculate withholding tax on vendor invoices.

It you have already posted a down payment for an invoice and withheld tax on it, the system automatically takes
the tax already paid into account.

To access the program, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Tax Deduction at Source: Classic.

Prerequisites
You have already entered the invoices and the down payments.

Features

Selection

On the selection screen, enter the following data:

z Run Program in Test Mode

We recommend that you first run the program in test mode, then once you are satisfied with the results, in
update mode.

z Process Invoices Only

Select this if you want to post TDS for a specific invoice. It speeds up the response time.

z TDS Date

This is the posting date that the system enters in the TDS document (update mode only).

Output

The system displays a list of invoices and specifies whether there are any down payments to be cleared against
them.

Activities
In the output list, you can clear an invoice against a down payment as follows:

1. Position the cursor on the invoice that you want to clear the down payment against and choose .
2. Select the down payment that you want to clear.
3. Save the down payment.

The system:

z Creates an accounting document to clear the down payment and reduce the vendor liability
z Recalculates the withholding tax base amount and the withholding tax amount, based on the amount of the
down payment against which the invoice was cleared.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 11 of 222

You can also clear invoices against down payments by first taking a list of all the invoices listed
above by choosing . You can then clear them by choosing Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Document Entry → Down Payment → Clearing, and then clear each invoice one by one.

By clicking on the document numbers, you can display the document of the TDS posting.

You will have to make a manual FI posting to transfer the amounts from the respective withholding
tax accounts (as defined in the withholding tax line items) to the TDS government payable vendor
account. To make the payment to the TDS government payable vendor account, from the SAP Easy
Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry
→ Outgoing Payment → Post.

Handling of Credit Memos


Use
This procedure shows you what happens if you post a credit memo against a vendor invoice. If you have already
remitted the TDS from the invoice, the credit memo against that invoice is not considered at all for processing.
Otherwise, the system calculates TDS for the amount stated on the credit memo and debits it from the TDS
payable account.

Procedure
1. You post a credit memo, entering with the invoice number as the reference number.
2. You post the TDS in test mode.

The system displays a message, telling you to run the program in update mode.

3. You post the TDS in update mode.

The system makes the appropriate posting and displays the number of the credit memo along with the TDS
posting document.

Making Down Payments on Invoices Where TDS Has


Been Calculated
Use
If you have withheld TDS on an invoice but not yet remitted it to the government, and the invoice needs to be
cleared against a down payment, you have to adjust the tax amount accordingly.

Prerequisites
You have posted the invoice and the TDS document has been created.

Procedure
1. Clear the down payment against the invoice using the standard clearing transaction.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 12 of 222

2. The next time you run the TDS posting program in update mode, the system makes a posting to correct the
TDS, by debiting the G/L account associated with the entered tax code. It also displays the numbers of the
down payment clearing document and the TDS document.

Reversing TDS Postings


Use
If you reverse an invoice or down payment that you have already calculated TDS on, you also have to reverse the
TDS postings.

Procedure
When you reverse a down payment in the standard, the system automatically reverses the TDS posting. When
you reverse an invoice, the system reverses the TDS posting the next time you run the TDS report in update
mode.

Remittance Challans
Use
When you have remitted the deducted TDS to the government, you are sent a bank challan confirming that
payment has been received. The system allows you to record the number of the challan in the invoices from which
the TDS had been deducted and paid.

You can also use this function to change the challan number or date later on, if necessary.

Features

To access this report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Enter Remittance Challans.

Selection

The system displays the transactions on which you have withheld TDS. You select the transactions for which you
have remitted the TDS, enter the challan details. The system then records the challan number in each of the
transactions.

If you need to change a challan number or date, enter the challan number and date that is to be changed.

The actual TDS amount and the surcharge on this TDS amount are shown separately.

To handle cases where the company needs to have many TAN numbers, you can enter the TAN number when you
update the challan number. This number will be used subsequently for the certificates.

Print Certificates
Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 13 of 222

You use this program to print TDS certificates for your vendors (individually or in batches). It covers the TDS in all
the invoices and down payments that you have posted over a specified period.

To access the program, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Certificates → Print → Vendors.

There is a separate print program for one-time vendors, which you can access from the SAP Easy
Access screen, by choosing Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Withholding
Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Certificates → Print → One-Time Vendors.

Prerequisites
You have already remitted the TDS to the government and recorded the challan number in the transactions
concerned (see Update of Challans). Only transactions with a challan number can be included in certificates.

The certificate printing program uses SAPscript form J_1ITDSCERT. If there are some changes in the certificate
format this layout set can be changed accordingly.

If the certificates are to be divided by business area, with a unique number range per business area, you must
have maintained the sections as a combination of section and business area, so for business area 0001 and
section 194C, you could maintain the section as 194C0001, for example.

Features

Selection

Enter data as required, including:

z The dates of the transactions that are to be covered in the certificate


z Withholding tax section

If you enter the business area in combination with the section, it must also be used in all other
transactions involving this certificate, including annual returns.

Output

If you select the preview option, the system displays a certificate without any certificate number. The number will
be assigned only when the certificate is actually printed directly (not from the print preview).

A summary of all the certificates is printed at the end, summarized by certificate and challan number.

Reprint Certificates
Use
You use this program to reprint TDS certificates.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 14 of 222

To access the program, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Certificates → Reprint.

Features

Selection

On the selection screen, enter the numbers of the certificates that you want to reprint and the details of the
signatory.

Output

The system prints the certificates. Each certificate is marked as a duplicate.

Cancel Certificates
Use
You use this program to cancel TDS certificates.

To access the program, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Certificates → Cancel.

Features

Selection

Enter data as required, including the number of the certificate that you want to cancel.

Output

The system marks the certificate as canceled. It does not delete it from the database.

Archiving of TDS Documents


Use
You use these functions to archive documents for tax deducted at source (TDS). For more information about
archiving, see Introduction to Data Archiving.

Prerequisites
Before you can archive this data, you must have archived the related data form Financial Accounting (FI) and
Material Management (MM).

Features
The TDS documents are archived using archiving object J_1ITDS, which is supplied with Country Version India
(CIN). It is used for archiving the data in tables J_1ITDS and J_1ICERTIF.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 15 of 222

Once you have archived the TDS documents, you must delete the originals from the database. Once you have
deleted the originals, you can reload them from the archive file. Finally, you can also analyze them.

Archiving TDS Documents


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable →
Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Utilities → Archive Documents.

In the Object Name field, the system displays the name of the archiving object, J_1ITDS.

2. Choose Archive.
3. Enter data as follows:

{ Variant

Enter the report variant that you want to use. You can create a variant if you need to.

{ User Name

Enter the name of user who will archive the data.

4. To specify when to start the report, choose Start Date.


5. To enter the print parameters, choose Spool Params.
6. Choose .

Creating an Archive Report Variant


1. Choose Maintain.
2. Enter a variant name of your choice.
3. Choose Create.
4. Specify which certificates you want to archive and enter other data as required:

{ Create

Specifies that the program will run in update mode.

{ Delete in test mode

Select this for test runs.

{ Package

Enter the optimum package size.

{ Comments

Enter any comments for your own reference.

5. Choose Attributes.
6. Enter data as required.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 16 of 222

7. Save the variant.


8. Go back to the Archive Management: Create Archive Files screen.

Deleting TDS Documents


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable →
Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Utilities → Archive Documents.

In the Object Name field, the system displays the name of the archiving object, J_1ITDS.

2. Choose Delete.
3. In the User Name field, enter the name of user who will delete the documents.
4. Select Test Run if you do not want to run the report in update mode.

This will report any inconsistencies between the table data and the archive file that can be fixed.

5. To specify what archive file you want to delete the documents for, choose Archive selection.
6. To specify when to start the report, choose Start Date.
7. To enter the print parameters, choose Spool Params.
8. Choose .

Reloading TDS Documents


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable →
Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Utilities → Archive Documents.

In the Object Name field, the system displays the name of the archiving object, J_1ITDS.

2. Choose Reload.
3. Enter data as follows:

{ Variant

Enter the report variant that you want to use. You can create a variant if you need to.

{ User Name

Enter the name of user who will reload the data.

4. To specify what archive file you want to reload the documents from, choose Archive Selection.
5. To specify when to start the report, choose Start Date.
6. To enter the print parameters, choose Spool Params.
7. Choose .

Archive Overview
Use
You use this report to find out where you have archived a tax deducted at source (TDS) document.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 17 of 222

Features

Selection

On the selection screen, you specify which TDS documents you want to view. You can make your selection by
vendor, business area, and TDS certificate number.

Activities

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax → Utilities → View Archived Documents.

Transaction Codes for Classic Withholding Tax


Transaction Code Action
J1INC Post withholding tax on invoices
J1I8 Enter remittance challans
J1ICCERT Print withholding tax certificates for vendors
J1ICOTV Print withholding tax certificates for onetime vendors
J1ICREP Reprint withholding tax certificates
J1ICREP Cancel withholding tax certificates
J1INEFILE Prepare TDS returns
J1IHBK Copy bank IDs from invoice to TDS document
J2ID Archive TDS documents
J2IE Display archived TDS documents

Extended Withholding Tax


Use
Country Version India contains a number of features that complement the generic Extended Withholding Tax
solution. For information about the generic functions, see Extended Withholding Tax. The country-specific
features are described in the following documentation.

Features
Using the Extended Withholding Tax solution, you can withhold and report tax under all sections of the Income Tax
Act listed in Withholding Tax.
Since a company may consist of more than one entity responsible for withholding taxes, each of which is identified
by a separate TAN, you use a separate SAP organizational unit to represent each entity, the section code.

Activities
Customizing
For generic information about customizing Extended Withholding Tax, see Settings for Extended Withholding
Tax: Overview.
Country Version India comes with sample Customizing settings for all of the aforementioned sections of the Income
Tax Act. The settings include:
• Withholding tax types
• Withholding tax codes
• Official withholding tax keys, which represent the different sections of the Income Tax Act
• Recipient types, which represent the categorization of taxpayers into "companies" and "others," again, as

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 18 of 222

per the Income Tax Act


You must also customize your own section codes.
Master Data
Enter the required information in the vendor masters and in the customer masters.
Day-to-Day Activities
You are required to calculate taxes either when you enter an invoice or when you make any sort of payment,
whichever comes first. Since a full payment is seldom made before the invoice arrives, that means in effect that
you withhold taxes when you enter an invoice or a down payment.
When you enter a vendor invoice or make a down payment that is liable to withholding tax, the system
automatically creates line items for the appropriate taxes, including surcharges. Since different taxes need to be
remitted on different dates, depending on the section of the Income Tax Act, the system also calculates and
records each line item's due date.
If you first make a down payment (and withhold tax on it) and then enter the vendor invoice later on, you have to
clear the invoice against the down payment so that you do not withhold tax on the same item twice.
As far as your receivables are concerned, you also enter withholding tax certificates sent to you by your customers,
as proof of tax that they have withheld on payments to you.
Periodic Processing
At the end of each period, you make provisions for taxes on services received.
The authorities in India require you to remit taxes following a specific procedure. First, you create a remittance
challan with a list of the withholding tax items that you are remitting. You then send the challan to the authorities,
along with the check. Once the check has been cashed, the bank sends you a bank challan to confirm the
payment. You then enter the bank challan in the system.
The system automatically tracks each withholding tax item's remittance challan and bank challan.
When you have remitted the tax, you can print out withholding tax certificates for all taxes that you have withheld,
using functions specific to Country Version India.
Before you create your annual returns, you can also check for any customers that have not yet sent you a
withholding tax certificate for tax that they have withheld from you.
Again, with receivables, if you make interest payments to your customers, you must also withhold tax on them as
appropriate.
Reporting
Country Version India offers a report that you can use to prepare annual returns, and a Withholding Tax
Information System for tracking and reporting purposes.
See also:
Accounts Payable (FI-AP)
Accounts Receivable (FI-AR)

Section Code
Definition
A system object that represents the organizational unit responsible for collecting and remitting withholding tax, as
identified by a TAN.
Each company can have more than one TAN, so in the SAP system, a company code can also have multiple
section codes.

Use
Customizing
Define section codes in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial Accounting Global
Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Basic Settings → India → Define Section Codes.
Day-to-Day Activities
When you post a document with a withholding tax item (for example, a vendor invoice or a credit memo), enter the

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 19 of 222

section code in order to make sure that the tax item is assigned to the correct TAN. For more information, see
Entering Vendor Invoices.
In order to ensure that you always enter a section code, we recommend that you create a validation for this field.
Periodic Processing
When you print withholding tax certificates, each of your section codes can define its own forms, depending on
which format is required by the income tax office. The certificate supplied with the standard system also shows the
address data from the section code.
Reporting
Each TAN holder files its own tax returns. When you prepare a TDS return, you enter the TAN holder’s section
code on the selection screen. The annual returns then show only the withholding tax items that are assigned to that
section code.

Withholding Tax Type


Definition

See withholding tax type. For generic information about withholding tax types, see Defining Withholding Tax
Types.

Use

Customizing

You define withholding tax types in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial Accounting
Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Calculation → Withholding Tax Type → Define
Withholding Tax Type for Invoice Posting and … → Define Withholding Tax Type for Payment Posting.

Country Version India comes with one set of sample withholding tax types for calculating tax at invoice posting and
another one for calculating tax at payment posting. Both sets contain two separate tax types for each of the
supported sections of the Income Tax Act (see Extended Withholding Tax), one for basic-rate tax and one for the
surcharge.

All of the withholding tax types are customized so that certificate numbers are not assigned at this level. They are
assigned by the programs that you use for printing the withholding tax certificates instead.

When you have defined the withholding tax types, define the withholding tax codes and recipient types.

Master Data

Assign the appropriate withholding tax types to your vendor masters and customer masters.

Day-to-Day Activities

When you enter a document that is liable to tax (for example, when you enter a vendor invoice), the system
automatically applies the tax type and tax code appropriate to that vendor or customer.

See also:

Accounts Payable (FI-AP)

Accounts Receivable (FI-AR)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 20 of 222

Withholding Tax Code


Definition
For generic information about withholding tax codes, see Defining Withholding Tax Codes.

Use
Customizing
Define the withholding tax codes in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial Accounting
Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Calculation → Withholding Tax Codes →
Define Withholding Tax Codes.
Country Version India comes with a sample tax code for each of the sample withholding tax types provided. The
basic-rate withholding tax codes are set to 2%; the surcharge tax codes are set to 0.4%.
For reporting purposes, assign each withholding tax code to a withholding tax key.
Observe the special procedures when you customize withholding tax codes for Section 194 A of the Income Tax
Act (see Exemptions and Reduced Rates for Section 194 A).
You must use withholding tax codes with posting indicator 1, otherwise you cannot clear down payments against
invoices or remit withholding taxes.
Master Data
Assign the appropriate withholding tax codes to your vendor masters and customer masters.
Day-to-Day Activities
When you enter a document that is liable to tax (for example, when you enter a vendor invoice), the system
automatically applies the tax type and tax code appropriate to that vendor or customer.
See also:
Accounts Payable (FI-AP)
Accounts Receivable (FI-AR)

Withholding Tax Key


Definition
A system object that you use to classify withholding tax items according to which section of the Income Tax Act
they belong to. This information is required in TDS returns.

Use
Customizing
Check the withholding tax keys provided in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial
Accounting Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Basic Settings → Define
Withholding Tax Keys.
Assign an official withholding tax key to each withholding tax code.
Day-to-Day Activities
Whenever you post a withholding tax item, assign it a withholding tax code as normal. Since each withholding tax
code is also assigned to an withholding tax key, the system automatically knows which section of the Income Tax
Act you have withheld the tax under.
Reporting
When you prepare a TDS return, it shows which section of the Income Tax Act you withheld each item under.

Recipient Type

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 21 of 222

Definition
A system object that you use to classify payment recipients as legal persons or natural persons, for the purposes of
withholding tax reporting.

Use
Customizing
Define the recipient types in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial Accounting Global
Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Basic Settings → Check Recipient Types.
For each withholding tax type, create two entries as follows:
Recipient Type Text
CO Companies
OT Others
Country Version India comes with sample settings for the sample withholding tax types provided.
Master Data
Enter the recipient type in each vendor master and each customer master.
Reporting
The TDS returns separate the information about taxes withheld on legal persons and on natural persons.

Exemptions and Reduced Rates for Section 194 A


Use
Under Section 194 A of the Income Tax Act, you withhold tax on interest payments that you make, with the
exception of interest on securities. You declare such taxes withheld using form 26A.
However, some payments are exempt from withholding tax, and on others, you only have to withhold tax at a
reduced rate – for example, if the recipient of the payment is a bank or is a company in possession of an
exemption certificate.
When you prepare your annual return, you have to declare how much interest you have paid to companies without
withholding tax or with reduced-rate tax.

Activities
Customizing
Define separate withholding tax codes for calculating withholding taxes at the reduced rates and for exemptions.
Make the additional settings for the withholding tax codes in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing
Financial Accounting Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Calculation →
Exemptions and Reductions.
Master Data
Enter the appropriate withholding tax codes in your customer masters and vendor masters as normal. Do not enter
any exemption reasons.
Day-to-Day Activities
Whenever you post a withholding tax item that falls under this section of the Income Tax Act, make sure that you
use the appropriate tax code.
Reporting
When you create a TDS return, it shows how many rupees’ worth of business you have taxed at a reduced rate,
and how much was exempt from tax.

Exemptions and Reduced Rates Under Sections 197 and


197 A

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 22 of 222

Use
Under sections 197 and 197 A of the Income Tax Act, the Income Tax Department can grant companies
exemptions from having tax withheld from payments to them, or reduce the withholding tax rates.
You need to record this information in the system and report it in TDS returns.

Activities
Customizing
Define separate withholding tax codes for calculating withholding taxes at the reduced rates and for exemptions.
Make the additional settings for the withholding tax codes in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing
Financial Accounting Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Basic Settings →
India → Exemptions and Reductions.
Master Data
Enter the appropriate withholding tax codes in your vendor masters as normal. Do not enter any exemption
reasons.
Reporting
When you prepare a TDS return, it shows how many rupees’ worth of business you have taxed at a reduced rate,
and how much was exempt from tax.
See also:
Withholding Tax Code
Vendor Master (Withholding Tax Data)
TDS Returns

Surcharges
Use
As well as withholding tax on payments to vendors, in India, you may also be required to withhold a surcharge.

Features
Some tax offices require you to track surcharges separately from the basic withholding tax, that is, to create
separate line items for the surcharges. Others prefer you to combine the two in a single line item. The system
supports both calculation methods.

Activities
Customizing
Set up the surcharge function in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial Accounting
Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Basic Settings → India → Surcharges.
Create withholding tax types and withholding tax codes for the surcharges. The standard system comes with
samples for both.
Day-to-Day Activities
When you enter a vendor invoice, the system automatically calculates any surcharges that apply. It either creates
one withholding tax item or two, depending on how you have customized the system.
The following examples assume that the surcharge is 2% of the basic-rate withholding tax:

Vendor Invoice with Surcharges Shown Separately

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 23 of 222

Vendor Invoice with Surcharges Combined with Other Withholding Tax Items

Reporting
No matter which of the calculation methods you use, TDS returns show the surcharges separately.

Tax Due Dates


Use
When you enter a vendor invoice, the SAP system automatically determines what date you have to remit the
withholding tax to the tax office and records it in the tax line item.

Features
There are several factors that influence the tax due date, all of which you can customize:

• Which section of the Income Tax Act the tax is from (represented in the SAP system by the official
withholding tax key)

• Whether the vendor is classified as a company or not (in the system, the recipient type)

• In the event of the tax being due on a public holiday, whether the tax office requires you to remit the
tax a day earlier or a day later

Activities
Customizing
Set up the due dates in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial Accounting Global
Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Basic Settings → India → Maintain Tax Due Dates.
In Customizing for FI, under Financial Accounting Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding
Tax → Basic Settings → India → Assign Factory Calendars to Section Codes, specify whether, in the event of the
due date falling on a public holiday, you must remit the tax on the day before or the day after.
Day-to-Day Activities
When you enter a vendor invoice, the system automatically determines the tax due date and enters it in the tax line
item.
Periodic Processing
When you come to create a remittance challan to remit the withholding tax, the system uses the tax due date.

Withholding Tax on Interest Payments to Customers


Use
Under Section 194 A of the Income Tax Act you are required to withhold tax on interest payments that you make to
customers.
To calculate the interest, use the Balance Interest Calculation program, which calculates the interest and the
amount of tax to be withheld.

Activities

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 24 of 222

Customizing
You have made the settings for interest calculation in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing
Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable → Business Transactions → Interest Calculation.
Periodic Processing
Execute the program as described in the documentation.
There are two types of output. The system either creates a batch input session, which you can process, or it
displays the details of the interest to be posted, which you can post manually. In both cases, you must ensure that
each customer line item contains a section code.
The program creates an accounting document as follows:

It copies the section code from the customer line item to the withholding tax item, and calculates the tax due date
(see Tax Due Dates).

Journal Vouchers
Use
If, after you have entered and cleared a vendor invoice and you have discovered that you have posted the wrong
amount of tax or that you have posted the tax using the wrong official tax key, you have to enter a journal voucher
(JV) to correct the error.

To access the function, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax → Journal Vouchers → Enter.

Prerequisites
You have maintained the settings in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial Accounting
Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Postings → India → Journal Vouchers.

Features
You only need to create JVs to adjust withholding tax items and vendor items that you have already cleared.
Otherwise, you can reverse the original document using the generic functions.

You do not need to adjust a tax item if you have already issued a withholding tax certificate for it and the vendor
has accepted it, since, in this case, the vendor can use this certificate to claim a refund from the tax authorities.

When you enter a journal voucher, the system creates an accounting document as follows:

Type of change Debit Credit

Tax refund to vendor (tax already remitted) Loss account Vendor account

Tax refund to vendor (tax not yet remitted) Tax payable account Vendor account

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 25 of 222

Tax increase, payable by vendor Vendor account Tax payable

If you have already remitted the tax to the tax office and you change the tax code so that it uses a different official
withholding tax key, the system makes a second posting to correct the tax under the right tax key. This posting
debits the loss account and credits the tax expense account.

See also:

Entering Journal Vouchers

Entering Journal Vouchers


1. In the Document Number field, enter the invoice number.
2. Enter other data as required and choose Check.
3. Depending on what you want to change, choose Amount Correction or Tax Code Correction.
4. Change the tax amount to the correct amount, or change the tax code.

To check what adjustment posting will be made, select the line item that you have changed and choose
Simulate.

5. Save the journal voucher.

Provisions for Taxes on Services Received


Purpose
In India, when you come to prepare your financial statements, you are required to make an adjustment entry for
any accrued withholding taxes.

That means that if, when you prepare your statements, a vendor has provided you with some services but not yet
sent you an invoice, you make an adjustment entry for the taxes that you will withhold on the vendor payment.
When you make the entry, you must take into account any tax that you have already withheld on any down
payments that you have made.

Once the vendor sends the invoice, you reverse the provision.

Prerequisites
In Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), you have made the settings under Financial Accounting Global
Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Postings → India → Provisions for Taxes on Services
Received.

Process Flow

1. A clerk enters a purchase order for services to be provided.


2. A vendor provides you with some services on 25 January, and the clerk enters the service receipt in the
system accordingly.

The system then automatically creates the following accounting document:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 26 of 222

3. At month-end, the vendor has not sent you an invoice. You will be required to withhold tax on the payment,
so you enter a provision for the withholding tax.

The system creates an accounting document as follows:

You can now prepare your financial statements correctly.

4. On 7 February, the vendor sends you the invoice, and you enter it in the system.

When you enter the invoice, the system automatically calculates how much tax you have to withhold when
you pay the vendor. It does not clear the provision against the invoice, so at this moment your accounts are
actually incorrect, because they have two entries for the same amount of withholding tax.

5. In the evening, you reverse the provision.

The system creates the following accounting document:

By reversing the provision, you put your accounts in order again.

Entering Provisions

On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax → Provisions for Tax on
Services Received → Enter.

Enter the following information:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 27 of 222

{ Organizational data, such as company code and financial year

{ The G/L accounts that you want to post provisions for

{ Other information relating to the items that you want to adjust (for example, vendors or purchase
orders)

{ Information relating to the posting document that the system will make the tax postings with

Choose .

A list appears, which shows you per purchase the following:

Column Information
Open amount The total amount of all services received that have yet to be
invoiced, irrespective of whether you have already calculated tax
on them
Open provision The amount from goods receipts that you have already calculated
tax on
LC bas.amt (Base The amount on which tax still has to be calculated
amount in local currency)

You now have to specify how much tax has to be withheld. For each purchase order:

Enter the tax type and tax code of the tax that has to be applied

Use invoice tax types only.

Enter the section code.

Enter the business area, if required.

If you have made a down payment on the purchase order, reduce the tax base amount by this amount.

5. When you have entered all the data, save it.

Reversing Provisions
Use
Follow this procedure to reverse provisions that you have made for taxes on services rendered. You can only
reverse the provisions for invoices that you have received since you posted the provision.

We recommend that you run this program every night in the background, in order to avoid
discrepancies in your data.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 28 of 222

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable →
Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax → Provisions for Tax on Services Received →
Reverse.
2. On the selection screen, enter:

{ Organizational data, such as the company code


{ The posting date of the invoices
{ The posting period

3. Choose .

Remittance of Withholding Tax


Purpose
You are required to follow a specific procedure when remitting withholding tax to the authorities.

Prerequisites
Before you remit your withholding tax, you must have entered any provisions for taxes on services received.

Process Flow

When the time comes to remit a given sort of tax (see Tax Due Dates), you create a remittance challan.

The system creates an accounting document to transfer the withholding tax items to the appropriate bank
account.

You send the challan to your bank with a check for the appropriate amount.

After a few days, the bank sends you a bank challan to confirm that it has received your check.

You enter the bank challan in the system.

When you do so, the program records the bank challan number in every withholding tax item remitted.
This information may be required in order to substantiate your accounts.

Result
You can create withholding tax certificates for the withholding tax items that you have remitted.

Remittance Challans
Use
The system allows you to create and cancel remittance challans for payables and receivables.

Prerequisites
You have made the Customizing settings in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial
Accounting Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Postings → India → Remittance

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 29 of 222

Challans.

Features
Accounting Documents
When you create a remittance challan, the system identifies which withholding tax items need to be remitted (see
Tax Due Date).
It then creates an accounting document to clear these items from the withholding tax payable account to the bank
account that you want to transfer the tax from.
Challan Numbers
The system generates separate remittance challans for each tax office (section code) and each section of the
Income Tax Act (withholding tax key) and numbers each one accordingly. It records the challan number in the
withholding tax items for future reference, although you cannot display it directly from any of the system
transactions.
Constraints
The programs do not cover part payments of tax items or residual payments.

Creating Remittance Challans

To access the programs, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial
Accounting → Accounts Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax →
Remittance of Withholding Tax → Create Remittance Challan or Accounting → Financial
Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax for
Payments to Customers → Remittance of Withholding Tax → Create Remittance Challans.

On the selection screen, enter the following data:

{ Organizational data, such as company code and section code (TAN)

{ Which withholding tax items you want to remit

We recommend that in order to get the most accurate selection, you enter a payment due date.

If you need to restrict the selection to a specific vendor or customer, for example, if you want to remit the
tax for government bodies only, you can do so.

{ Tax remittance information, including any charges made by your bank for accepting the check

Choose .

The system calls the standard outgoing payment program, which presents you with a selection of tax line
items for clearing.

To make it easier for you to select the open items, we recommend that you create a line layout that
includes the following fields:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 30 of 222

• Value Date (tax due date)

• Section Code

• Reference Key 3 (tax code and recipient type information)

• Text (information on down payment clearing tax transfer)

Activate the items that you want to remit and make a note of the total in the Assigned field.

Choose .

The system displays an overview of the line items created so far, including any bank charges that you
have entered, and an offsetting posting to deduct your bank account.

Double-click the credit entry for your bank account.

Change the amount so that it matches the total line items (from step 3) plus the bank charges.

Choose Document → Simulate.

The system goes back to the line item overview.

To update the overview, choose Document → Simulate.

Save the document.

The program displays a list with the details of the challan numbers generated and the tax remitted. Basic
withholding tax and surcharges are listed separately.

Canceling Remittance Challans


Purpose
If for any reason an error occurs when you create a remittance challan, you use this function to cancel the challan
and reverse the accounting document. This function does not work, however, if you have already entered the bank
challan (see Entering Bank Challans).

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable →
Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax → Remittance of Withholding Tax → Cancel
Remittance Challan or Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable → Withholding Tax →
India → Withholding Tax for Payments to Customers → Remittance of Withholding Tax → Cancel
Remittance Challan.
2. Specify which accounting document you want to reverse. This is the accounting document that the system
created when you created the remittance challan.
3. Choose .

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 31 of 222

The system prompts you to specify what sort of reversal you want to make.

4. Choose Resetting and Reverse.


5. Enter a reversal reason and choose .

The system displays two dialog boxes, one with the number of the document posted. After you have closed
the dialog box, you go back one screen to display a list of the documents that you have reversed.

Result
The system:

z Cancels the remittance challan


z Creates an accounting document to reverse the postings made when you create the remittance challan

Entering Bank Challans


Purpose
When the bank sends you a bank challan, you enter the bank challan in the system. The system stores the bank
challan number in all remitted withholding tax items by way of proof that you have remitted the tax.

Procedure

On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax → Remittance of Withholding
Tax → Enter Bank Challan or Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Receivable →
Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax for Payments to Customers → Remittance of
Withholding Tax → Enter Bank Challan.

Enter data as required, including:

{ Organizational data, such as your company code

{ Remittance challan number

{ Bank challan details

Choose .

Result
The system:
• Records the bank challan details in the remitted withholding tax items

This information will be included in the vendor withholding tax certificates when you print them.

• Displays a list of the updated items

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 32 of 222

Withholding Tax Certificates for Vendors and Customers


Use
You must present your vendor or customer with a withholding tax certificate within 60 days of the business
transaction.
You do not use the generic programs for printing withholding tax certificates. Instead, Country Version India offers
two programs that you can use to print withholding tax certificates, one for vendors and one for customers.

Prerequisites
You can only print the certificates once you have remitted the tax in question and entered the bank challans. Any
other tax items will not be included in the certificates.

Features
Certificates
The programs print a separate certificate for each vendor or customer. Each certificate shows all the withholding
tax items belonging to that vendor of customer. The items are listed according to their bank challan number, as
required by law.
The program numbers the certificates, but only when you print the certificates directly, not in the print preview.
If you have had dealings with the same vendor or customer in more than one tax jurisdiction (tax office), the system
prints a separate certificate for each tax office. The system allows you to print out the certificates on different
SAPscript forms for every tax office and every section of the Income Tax Act, if required.
Credit Memos, Down Payments
The system deducts credit memos and down payments from the invoices that they belong to, if such information is
available.
One-Time Accounts
For one-time vendors or one-time customers, only one business transaction is printed. The address details are
taken from the appropriate document for the vendor or customer.
Separate programs are available for reprinting and canceling vendor certificates.

Activities
Customizing
Make the Customizing settings for the programs in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing
Financial Accounting Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Postings → India →
Vendor Withholding Tax Certificates.
Since you do not need the generic programs for printing withholding tax certificates, ignore the generic
Customizing activities.
Deactivate certificate numbering in the withholding tax types.
Master Data
Maintain your section codes' address data, and maintain your customers' and vendors' PANs (see Vendor Master
(Country Version India Data) and Customer Master (Country Version India Data)). This data will be printed out on
the certificates.
Periodic Processing
You print vendor withholding tax certificates and customer withholding tax certificates once monthly or once
annually as required.
If necessary, you can reprint and cancel withholding tax certificates for your vendors (but not for your customers).

Print Vendor Withholding Tax Certificates


Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 33 of 222

You use this program to print out withholding tax certificates for vendors.
To access the program, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax → Withholding Tax Certificates → Print.

Features
Selection
On the selection screen, enter the following data:
• Organizational information, for example, your company code
• The section code and withholding tax key that you want to create forms for
• Details of the bank challans that you want to cover
• Information that is to appear on the certificates
Output
The program:
• Prints out the certificates, numbered consecutively
• Displays a list of all the certificates printed, grouped by certificate, challan, and section code

Reprint Vendor Withholding Tax Certificates


Use
You use this program to reprint withholding tax certificates for vendors.

Note that you can only reprint one certificate at a time, and that you cannot reprint withholding tax certificates for
customers.

To access the program, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax → Withholding Tax Certificates →
Reprint.

Features

Selection

On the selection screen, enter data as follows:

z The company code


z The number and date of the original certificate

Cancel Vendor Withholding Tax Certificates


Use
You use this program to cancel withholding tax certificates for vendors.

Note that you cannot cancel withholding tax certificates for customers.

To access the program, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax → Withholding Tax Certificates →

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 34 of 222

Cancel.

Features

Selection

On the selection screen, enter the following data:

z Company code
z The number and date of the original certificate

Print Customer Withholding Tax Certificates


Use
You use this program to print out withholding tax certificates for customers.
To access the program, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Receivable → Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax for Payments to Customers → Withholding Tax
Certificates → Print.

Features
Selection
On the selection screen, enter the following data:

• Organizational information, for example, your company code


• The section code and withholding tax key that you want to create forms for
• Details of the bank challans that you want to cover
• Information that is to appear on the certificates
Output
The program:
• Prints out the certificates, numbered consecutively
• Displays a list of all the certificates printed, grouped by certificate, challan, and section code

Withholding Tax Certificates from Customers


Use
You use this program to enter the withholding tax certificates sent to you by your customers.

When you enter a certificate, the system clears the withholding tax to a G/L account that records how much tax
your customers have withheld on your behalf, known as the customer tax creditable account. You can offset this
tax against your income tax payable at year-end.

You run the program immediately you receive a certificate from a customer.

To access the program, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Receivable → Withholding Tax → India → Tax Withheld by Customers → Enter Certificate.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 35 of 222

Prerequisites
You have maintained the settings in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), by choosing Financial Accounting
Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Postings → India → Withholding Tax
Certificates from Customers.

Features

Selection

On the selection screen, enter the following data:

z Your company details

In the Section field, enter the official withholding tax key that you use for the section of the Income Tax Law
in question.

z The numbers or posting dates of the documents that you want to clear

The certificate date serves as the posting date and the document date.

z The information from the certificate

When you execute the program, the system takes you to the standard clearing program. You then select which
withholding tax line items are to be cleared.

Output

The system creates an accounting document to transfer the withholding tax from the G/L account for the
withholding tax deducted by your customers to the customer tax creditable account.

Activities
If you need to reverse the clearing document, you can do so using the standard reversal program.

Selecting Which Line Items to Clear


1. On the Post with Clearing: Process Open Items screen, choose .
2. Double-click the line item.
3. In the Amount field, enter the amount of withholding tax as specified on the tax certificate.
4. Save the change.

The system automatically goes back to the Post with Clearing: Process Open Items screen.

5. Double-click the amounts that you want to clear.


6. Save your entries.

Withholding Tax Information System


Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 36 of 222

You use this report to gather information relating to the withholding tax transactions that you have carried out. You
can also use it for carrying out pending transactions like challan updates, bank challan updates, and certificate
printing. You can display the individual documents (invoices, down payments, challan clearing documents)
pertaining to withholding tax transactions. You can run this report at any stage in the withholding tax cycle in order
to obtain the necessary information.

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Extended Withholding Tax → Information System → Withholding Tax.

Features

Selection

On the selection screen, enter the selection criteria as required and specify which report you want:

z Challan Update Status

Displays a list of all documents involving withholding tax. For each document, it shows the tax amounts and
whether or not the tax has been remitted.

z Bank Challan Status

Displays the bank challan update status (whether carried out or not) of all transactions for which challan
updates have been carried out.

z Certificate Status

Displays the transaction details for which bank challans have been updated. It shows whether or not a
certificate has been issued for the transaction.

z Consolidated Report

Lists all documents involving withholding tax.

Activities
Each report contains functions for processing the documents in the list, as follows:

In the Challan Update Status report, you can create a remittance challan for various documents: Select the
documents that you want to remit the tax on and choose Challan Update. The system takes you to the Create
Remittance Challans program, which you then execute. However, you can only process documents for one
withholding tax section at a time.

In the Bank Challan Status report, you can enter a bank challan: Select the documents (in this case identified by
the internal challan numbers) that you have been sent a bank challan for and choose Bank Challan Update. The
system takes you to the Enter Bank Challans program, which you then execute. However, you can only a single
internal challan at a time.

In the Certificate Status report, you can print withholding tax certificates: Select the documents that you want to
print a certificate for and choose Certificate Printing. The system takes you to the Print Withholding Tax Certificates
program. However, you can only process documents for one withholding tax section at a time.

Transaction Codes for Extended Withholding Tax

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 37 of 222

Transaction Code Action


J1INJV Enter journal vouchers
J1INPR Enter provisions for taxes on services received
J1INUT Reverse provisions for taxes on services received
J1INCHLN Create remittance challans
J1INREV Reverse remittance challans
J1INBANK Enter bank challans
J1INCERT Print withholding tax certificates for vendors
J1INREP Reprint withholding tax certificates for vendors
J1INCANC Cancel withholding tax certificates for vendors
J1INCC Print withholding tax certificates for customers
J1INCUST Enter withholding tax certificates from customers
J1INEFILE Prepare TDS returns
J1INMIS Withholding Tax Information System

TDS Returns
Use
You use the TDS Returns report to generate electronic TDS returns for sections 194 A, C, D, I, and J of the Income
Tax Act.
To access the report, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Withholding Tax → India → Withholding Tax or Extended Withholding Tax → Reporting → TDS
Returns.

Use this report irrespective of whether you use the Classic TDS or the Extended Withholding Tax
solution. If you have migrated from Classic TDS to Extended Withholding Tax during the course of the
fiscal year, the report covers all withholding tax items that you posted under both solutions.

Prerequisites
You have customized the withholding tax solution as described in Extended Withholding Tax or Classic
Withholding Tax.
In particular, you have made the settings specifically for TDS returns in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI),
by choosing Financial Accounting Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax or Withholding
Tax → Reporting → India.
So that the report can handle reduced-rate taxes and exemptions under Sections 194, 197, and 197 A, you must
have customized the withholding tax codes accordingly (see “See also” below).

Features
Before you generate a TDS return, you can check which withholding tax items will be included in it. To do so, you
generate a list using the report.
Note that the report only covers withholding tax items that you have remitted to the authorities and for which you
have entered a bank challan in the system.
Selection
The selection screen breaks down as follows:
• Withholding Tax Datagroup box

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 38 of 222

Fill out either the EWT Section Code or the Withholding Tax (Classic) group box, depending on
whether you use Extended Withholding Tax or Classic Withholding Tax. However, if you have
migrated from Classic Withholding Tax to Extended Withholding Tax during the course of the fiscal
year, fill out both group boxes.

• Statutory Signatory Details and Address Details tabs

Enter your company’s details. The report saves this data in the electronic TDS return.

• Output Processing Options tab

Specify whether you want to list the withholding tax items for inclusion in the return, or generate an
electronic TDS return file, or both. If you want to generate a file, specify where you want the report to
save it.

Output
Depending on what settings you make on the selection screen, the report:
• Lists the withholding tax items for inclusion in the TDS return
• Generates an electronic file at the location that you specify
See also:
Exemptions and Reduced Rates for Section 194 A
Exemptions and Reduced Rates Under Sections 197 and 197 A

Migration from Withholding Tax to Extended


Withholding Tax
Purpose
This procedure shows you how to migrate from the Classic Withholding Tax solution (Classic TDS) to its
successor, Extended Withholding Tax.

In order for the existing documents involving with withholding tax items to be compatible with Extended Withholding
Tax, you have to migrate the data. But before you can do so, you have make the appropriate Customizing settings,
archive old documents, and so on. Follow the instructions given below.

Ensure that no one can post any documents in the company codes during the withholding tax
changeover. We recommend that you block your system for all end users and carry out the
conversion runs at the weekend.

You must also carry out the migration in a test system before you start work on your production
system.

Process Flow

Preparations

1. You implement Logistics Invoice Verification.


2. You archive all of the cleared items.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 39 of 222

3. You make the Customizing settings for Extended Withholding Tax.


4. You set up the authorizations for the Migration Program.
5. Just before you start the migration, you block the users from working in the system.

Migrating the Existing Transaction Data and Activating Extended Withholding Tax

1. Execute the Health Check Program


2. You map the Classic TDS tax codes to the Extended Withholding Tax types and codes.
3. You activate Extended Withholding Tax.
4. You maintain your vendor master records.
5. You migrate the documents.

Cleaning Up

You clean up the system.

Implementing Logistics Invoice Verification (MM-LIV)


Use
The customer carries out this step.

Classic TDS supports conventional invoice verification and Logistics Invoice Verification (MM-LIV) while Extended
Withholding Tax supports only Logistics Invoice Verification. After you have migrated, you cannot use conventional
invoice verification anymore.

If you do not use invoice verification of any kind, you do not need to take any action.

Procedure
Make the Customizing settings for Logistics Invoice Verification in the Implementation Guide (IMG) for Materials
Management, by choosing Invoice Verification → Logistics Invoice Verification.

Archiving Cleared Items


The customer carries out this step.

Archive as many cleared items as you can. Documents that have already been archived are not
converted, so you can considerably reduce the time required for the conversion run by doing so.

The number of cleared items managed in a system is usually much greater than the number of open
items. If, for example, a system contains a hundred times more cleared items than open items, it will
take a hundred times longer to convert the cleared items than to convert the open items.

For more information about archiving documents, see the SAP Library under Cross-Application Components Æ
Archiving Application Data (CA-ARC) Æ Financial Accounting (FI) Æ Archiving Financial Accounting Data (FI) Æ
Archiving FI Documents .

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 40 of 222

Procedure
1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting Æ Financial accounting Æ General ledger (or
Accounts receivable or Accounts payable) Æ Periodic processing Æ Archiving Æ Documents.
2. Archive the required cleared documents.

Customizing Extended Withholding Tax


Use
The customer carries out these steps.

Before you start the conversion of the withholding tax data, you must set up Extended Withholding Tax in the
Implementation Guide for Financial Accounting. Make the system settings described below.

Do not activate Extended Withholding Tax yet.

If you activate Extended Withholding Tax before converting the withholding tax data, documents
could be posted with Extended Withholding Tax. This could result in your system containing
documents with both classic withholding tax and Extended Withholding Tax which, in turn, could lead
to serious problems when you migrate the documents.

Procedure

1. Define the official withholding tax keys.


2. Define the withholding tax types and withholding tax codes.
3. Define the minimum and maximum amounts per type and code.
4. Make any additional settings.

Defining Official Withholding Tax Keys


1. In the Implementation Guide for Financial Accounting, choose Financial Accounting Global Settings →
Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Basic Settings → Define Official Withholding Tax Codes.
2. Define the official withholding tax keys (also known as official withholding tax codes) for reporting
withholding tax. For example, define the keys for the various sections of the Income Tax Act, 1961.

Defining Withholding Tax Types and Withholding Tax


Codes
Use
Define all types and codes that you require for all countries that you want to implement Extended Withholding Tax
in.

Procedure

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 41 of 222

Defining Withholding Tax Types

1. In the Implementation Guide (IMG) for Financial Accounting (FI), choose Financial Accounting Global
Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Calculation → Withholding Tax Type.
2. Make the necessary settings for the required withholding tax types in the following activities:
a. Define Withholding Tax Type for Payment Posting, and if necessary, Define Withholding Tax Type for
Invoice Posting
b. Define Rounding Rule for Withholding Type
c. Assign Condition Type to Withholding Tax Type

Defining Withholding Tax Codes

1. In the IMG for FI, choose Financial Accounting Global Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding
Tax → Calculation → Withholding Tax Codes → Define Withholding Tax Codes.
2. If any of the withholding tax codes use formulas to calculate withholding tax, you must also carry out the
activity Define Formulas for Calculating Withholding Tax.

Defining Minimum and Maximum Amounts


Use
Define, if necessary, the minimum and maximum amounts for the withholding tax codes and types that you have
defined.

Procedure

1. In the Implementation Guide for Financial Accounting, choose Financial Accounting Global Settings →
Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Calculation → Minimum and Maximum Amounts.
2. To define the minimum and maximum amounts for the withholding tax types, choose Define or Maintain
Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Types.
3. To define the minimum and maximum amounts for the withholding tax codes, choose Define or Maintain
Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Codes.

Making Additional Settings


Now that you have defined the withholding tax codes and types, make the remaining settings, including:

z Define the recipient types you need for your vendors and attach them to the appropriate vendor master
records.
z Make the account determination settings.
z Specify for each company code which withholding tax types they are allowed to withhold tax for.

Do not activate Extended Withholding Tax yet.

Setting Up Authorizations for Migration


Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 42 of 222

The customer carries out this step.

In this activity, you create authorization profiles for the people involved in the withholding tax migration. In order to
execute the Migration Program, you require the role TDS Supervisor or the authorization object J_1IEWTJV,
provided by SAP.

Once the withholding tax migration is completed, take the precaution of withdrawing the change
authorization for all the users involved. This prevents the conversion being started while the system is being
used for normal day-to-day activities, for example.

Procedure

1. In the Implementation Guide for Financial Accounting, choose Financial Accounting Global Settings →
Maintain Authorizations.
2. Make the required Customizing settings.

The authorization object J_1IEWTJV is in the India Version object class under the object name
Authorization Check for JV.

Blocking Users
The customer carries out this step.

Use
You must block the system for normal activities while the conversion is being prepared and carried out. Documents
must not be posted or processed, and master data must not be changed, otherwise your accounting documents
and system settings may contain serious discrepancies.

Procedure
1. Ensure that all users involved in the withholding tax changeover have the appropriate access authorizations.
2. Block your SAP System for all other users.

If it is not possible to take measures to ensure that there are no users working in the system, you should
block the users and the whole system throughout the organization.

Restart the SAP System so that all users are logged off.

Withholding Tax Migration Health Check


Use
You must execute this report before you proceed with the Migration Program. It makes sure that all the
Customizing settings have been made properly (for a list of the checks, see under Activities below), so that the
Migration Program will migrate the data correctly. Additionally, the report also displays a list of the documents that
you will not be able to process any more after the migration.
You must run the report for each company code that you want to carry out the migration for, and the health check
status for each company code must be OK.

Prerequisites

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 43 of 222

You have carried out all the activities described under Preparations in Migration from Classic TDS to Extended
Withholding Tax.

Features
To access the report, in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), choose Financial Accounting Global Settings →
Withholding Tax → Withholding Tax Changeover → Withholding Tax Changeover India → Health Check.
Selection
On the selection screen, enter the following data:
• Selection Criteria

{ Specify which country and which company code you want to perform the health check for. You can
only execute the report for one company code at a time.

{ Specify whether you want to run all checks, or just the obligatory ones. We recommend that you
perform all of the checks.

• Document Details

In this group box, you specify which sorts of documents you want the report to cover, and from which
dates.

• Other Checks

Specify whether you want the vendor master records to be checked, and the tax code mapping from
Classic TDS to Extended Withholding Tax.

Output
The output list shows:
• The results of the Customizing checks
• The documents that cannot be processed after the migration
• The results of the vendor master checks
• The results of the checks on the tax code mapping
The key is as follows:
Indicator Meaning
One check has been run on an obligatory Customizing activity, and the settings
are incorrect
One check has been run on an optional Customizing activity, and the settings
are incorrect
One check has been run on an obligatory Customizing activity, and the settings
are correct
Multiple checks have been run on an obligatory Customizing activity, and
some of the settings are incorrect
Multiple checks have been run on an obligatory Customizing activity, and all of
the settings are correct
Process all of the activities marked , , or , and execute the report again. Only when all activities are
marked or will the report assign the company code the status OK.

Activities
The report makes the following checks at country level:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 44 of 222

• Withholding tax country


• Official withholding tax key
• Withholding tax types
• Withholding tax codes
• Recipient types
• Tax due dates
• Rounding rules
• Business transaction events
And these at company code level:
• Company code global parameters
• Extended Withholding Tax has been activated
• Withholding tax codes are assigned to company code
• Accounts for withholding tax to be paid over have been defined
• Accounts for posting withholding tax and losses to be paid
• Clearing accounts liable to withholding tax
• Section codes have been defined
• Factory calendar has been assigned to section codes
• Creation of remittance challan
• Vendor withholding tax certificates
• Vendor master data
• Surcharge calculation

Mapping Withholding Tax Types and Withholding Tax


Codes
Use
You map the Classic TDS withholding tax codes to the Extended Withholding Tax withholding tax types and codes.

Procedure

1. From any screen, choose System → Services → Table maintenance → Extended Table Maintenance.
2. Enter table J_1IEWT_MIGRATE and choose Maintain.
3. Map the Classic TDS tax codes to the Extended Withholding Tax tax types and codes.
4. Save your entries.

Activating Extended Withholding Tax


Use
The customer carries out this step just before you migrate the data.

Procedure
1. In the Implementation Guide (IMG) for Financial Accounting (FI), choose Financial Accounting Global

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 45 of 222

Settings → Withholding Tax → Extended Withholding Tax → Company Code → Activate Extended
Withholding Tax.
2. Activate Extended Withholding Tax for each company code whose data you want to migrate.

Maintaining Vendor Master Records


Use
Here, you specify which withholding tax types apply to each vendor.

Under Extended Withholding Tax, you can assign any number of withholding tax types to a vendor’s master record.
When you come to make a posting involving withholding tax for this vendor, you can then enter withholding tax for
each withholding tax type that you have assigned it.

Make sure the withholding tax types in the vendor master record match those in the mapping table: When, during
migration, the system converts the various documents (for example, payments), it replaces any Classic TDS
withholding tax types with the Extended Withholding Tax types and codes that entered in the mapping table.
However, it does not cross-check the withholding tax type against the appropriate vendor master record. If, during
migration, the Migration Program assigns a document a withholding tax type that you have not assigned to the
vendor, you will not be able to process the document afterwards.

Prerequisites
Just before you start maintaining the vendor master records, activate Extended Withholding Tax for the company
code in question. Otherwise, the system will not display the appropriate fields. As soon as you have finished,
deactivate it.

Procedure
Make the changes in the vendor master records of all vendors that you have to withhold tax on. For each vendor:

z Enter the relevant withholding tax types


z Enter the relevant withholding tax codes and select Liable, in order to activate it
z Enter the recipient type
z Enter any exemption information

Withholding Tax Data Migration Tool


Use
This program converts documents created under the Classic TDS solution so that they are suitable for use with
Extended Withholding Tax. For example, after you have migrated to Extended Withholding Tax, neither the
Payment Program nor the Clearing Program will be able to work with Classic TDS documents.
This program migrates all documents involving withholding tax, such as invoices, down payments, down payment
clearing documents, and TDS documents. After the migration, the system will treat them as though they were
created using Extended Withholding Tax.

Integration
The program contains two user exits:
• Selecting the section code

The section code is mandatory in down payments that are to be migrated. You can either enter them by
filling out the selection screen or using the user exit. The user exit provides the section code, business

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 46 of 222

area, company code, and TAN number as input parameters. The appropriate section code can be derived
from this information.

• Data selection and validation

There are two user exits available to choose and validate additional clearing documents and down
payment documents.

Prerequisites
You have carried out all the steps in Migration from Classic TDS to Extended Withholding Tax under Preparations
and steps 1–4 under Migrating the Existing Transaction Data and Activating Extended Withholding Tax. You
cannot go back and complete these steps after you have migrated the documents.
In order to execute the program, you must have the role TDS Supervisor.

Features
To access the program, in Customizing for Financial Accounting (FI), choose Financial Accounting Global Settings
→ Withholding Tax → Withholding Tax Changeover → Withholding Tax Changeover India → Migration Program.
First check the documents to see if they will be migrated properly, and edit any that result in problems. Then, when
all the documents have been checked, migrate them.
Selection
On the selection screen, enter the following data:
• Selection Criteria

In this group box, specify which documents you want to migrate. If you enter invoice document numbers,
the system picks up the associated clearing documents.

• Additional Selection Criteria

Use these fields to refine your selection. If you need to migrate a large number of documents, we
recommend that you process one small quantity at a time in order to improve performance.

• Migration of Down Payments

If you want to migrate down payments, select this option. If you do, you must enter a section code or
have it defaulted by means of a user exit.

• Posting Run

Select this indicator to execute the program in test mode.

Output
In the result screen, verify the invoices and credit memos and check them. Down payments are only migrated after
you have checked them from the screen.
If you want to migrate down payments, the list shows all the open down payments. You then have to select the
down payments and save them for migrating the data.
You can migrate invoices, credit memos, clearing documents, and TDS documents on the above live or previewed.

Activities
Migrate invoices, credit memos, clearing documents, and TDS documents if you have not yet paid the vendor
or if the payment is likely to be reversed. You must decide before you start on the migration if this is likely or not.
Do not migrate the documents if the vendor has been paid and it is unlikely that you will have to reverse the
payment.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 47 of 222

Migrate all open down payments so that tax adjustment on down payment clearing could happen along with
clearing. Decide on the appropriate section code entity to which the down payments pertain and choose from the
list displayed.
If the status of a document changes, you execute the program again. For example, say that you have migrated an
invoice. If you then post TDS later on, you must migrate the invoice again so that the TDS document is also
migrated.
When you come to run the Automatic Payment Program and the error Inconsistent withholding tax information
occurs for a line item, one of the reasons could be that the line item is not migrated.

Checking the Documents


Use
In this step, you execute the report in test mode. The system:

z Shows you how many vendor items, open items, and cleared items it has found in the company code that
match your selection criteria
z Shows you how many vendor items and so on there are per Extended Withholding Tax code
z Checks the assignment of the Classic TDS withholding tax codes to the Extended Withholding Tax types
and codes to see whether the characteristics of each combination of type and code for extended withholding
tax correspond

Procedure
1. Fill out the selection screen, making sure that you have selected Test run for invoice/credit memo, and
choose .

The output list appears, with a list of the documents selected and any warnings.

2. Check the documents for any discrepancies that could lead to problems later on, when you make postings
for Extended Withholding Tax:

{ Check whether any documents are missing withholding tax codes.

If so, check whether the codes have been deleted by mistake, in which case you have to make the
relevant system settings again, or whether you intentionally wanted the tax code to be deleted.

{ Check whether any withholding tax codes exist that have not been used, and delete them.
{ Check down payments to see if the migrated base and tax are correct.

3. Correct any errors and execute the report again.

Migrating the Documents


Use
In this step, you execute the report in update mode. The system migrates the documents from Classic TDS to
Extended Withholding Tax. Note that this is the most time-consuming step.

Procedure

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 48 of 222

1. Fill out the selection screen, making sure that you have deselected Test run for invoice/credit memo, and
choose .

The output list appears, with a list of the documents selected and any warnings.

2. In the list, select the down payments that you want to migrate and save.

This procedure does not apply to any other types of documents.

Cleaning Up
Use
Once you have migrated the documents, there is some cleaning up to do in the sytem:

Procedure
1. Check the Customizing settings for Extended Withholding Tax.
2. Check, edit, and save any of the following, which the Migration Program does not handle:

{ Recurring entry documents


{ Sample documents
{ Noted items

3. Release the system

Once you have finished the migration and cleaning up activities, release the system for the users.

General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL)


Purpose
The General Ledger (FI-GL) component covers the most important laws and business practices specific to India.
The following documentation describes these aspects of the component. For generic information about FI-GL, see
General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL).

Features
The country template for India comes with its own chart of accounts and a financial statement version.

Chart of Accounts
Definition

See Chart of Accounts.

Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 49 of 222

The country template for India comes with its own chart of accounts, CAIN.

It contains all accounts common to most businesses in India. It also takes into account the requirements of
Schedule VI of the Companies Act 1956.

The country template also contains settings for automatic accounting postings in most components, with the
exception of Controlling (CO).

Financial Statement Version


Definition

See Financial Statement Version.

Use
The country template for India comes with its own financial statement version, BAIN. You can use it to prepare
financial statements in accordance with Schedule VI of the Companies Act 1956. This act lists the headings under
which the individual accounts are to be grouped. Each of the headings is represented by an item in the financial
statement version.

Accounts Payable (FI-AP)


Purpose
The Accounts Payable (FI-AR) component covers the most important laws and business practices specific to India.
The following documentation describes these aspects of the component. For generic information about FI-AP, see
Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable: Overview.

Features
Country Version India comes with a number of functions relating to withholding tax (see link below).

Extra fields are available in the vendor master data for information required in India only.

See also:

Withholding Tax

Vendor Master (Withholding Tax Data)


Definition
The part of the vendor master record where you record information about which taxes you have to withhold from
payments to a vendor.
For generic information about withholding tax data in the vendor master, see Defining Liability to Tax and
Authorization to Deduct Tax.
To access the vendor master, on the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Payable → Master Records → …

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 50 of 222

Use
Enter the withholding tax types and withholding tax codes that the vendor is liable to, and for each entry, enter the
recipient type, depending on whether the vendor is a legal person or a natural person.
See also:
Vendor Master (Country Version India Data)
Vendor Master (Excise Data)

Entering Vendor Invoices


Use
In India, when you enter a vendor invoice in Accounts Payable (FI-AP), you follow the standard procedure and, in
addition, you assign the invoice to the appropriate section code.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Document Entry → Invoice.

2. Enter the header data as required, including:

{ Bus. Place/Sectn: Your section code.

3. Enter other data and save the invoice.

Result
The system:

• Creates an accounting document with the necessary withholding tax items (including surcharges)
• Assigns all vendor items and withholding tax items to the section code that you have entered

Assigns each withholding tax item a tax due date, which it enters in the Value Date field (which is not shown
on the user interface)
When the time comes, you must:

• Remit the withholding tax

The system automatically selects which withholding tax items need to be remitted on the basis of their tax
due date.

• Create a withholding tax certificate for the vendor

If you post the wrong amount of tax or you have posted the tax using the wrong official withholding tax key, you can
enter a journal voucher to reverse the posting.

Entering Vendor Down Payments


Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 51 of 222

In India, when you enter a vendor down payment in Accounts Payable (FI-AP), you follow the standard
procedure and, in addition, you:

• Assign the down payment to the correct section code

• Calculate any withholding tax required

Procedure

1. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts
Payable → Document Entry → Down Payment → Down Payment.

2. On the Header Data screen, enter the header data as required and choose

3. On the Add Vendor Item screen, enter data as required, including:

− Bus. Pl. (Business Place): The section code handling the down payment

4. Save the down payment.

Result
The system creates an accounting document with the appropriate withholding tax items. It enters the business
place in each vendor item and each withholding tax item.

Clear Invoices Against Down Payments


Use
If you withhold tax on a vendor down payment, and the vendor then sends you an invoice, you have to clear the
withholding tax when you have entered the invoice (not when you pay the invoice, as is customary in other
countries).

Features
This function has been incorporated into the standard function for clearing down payments (see Clearing). When
you clear an invoice against a down payment for an Indian company code, the system clears the withholding tax
automatically, if the company code is located in India.

Activities
Customizing
In order for the tax to be cleared correctly, you must post the down payments using:
• A withholding tax type that is marked as Central Inv. Prop. (Central invoice proportionate)
• A withholding tax code that uses the posting indicator 1 (Standard posting: bank/vendor/customer line item
reduced)

If you use either of the other two methods, the adjustment will be made against the offsetting account
instead of the vendor account.

Day-to-Day Activities
Make sure that the withholding tax codes you use when you enter the down payment and the invoice are assigned
to the same withholding tax key, otherwise the clearing program will not let you clear them.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 52 of 222

Once you have posted the vendor invoice, clear the down payment against it. To access the function, on the SAP
Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Accounts Payable → Document Entry →
Down Payment → Clearing.

Example
A vendor provides you with some services, for which it promises to send you an invoice in a few days' time.

In the meantime, you make a down payment on the services for a total of INR 10,000, presenting the vendor with a
check for INR 9,796 and withholding the remaining INR 204 as tax:

A week later, the vendor sends you the invoice, for a total of INR 20,000 – on which you have to withhold a total of
INR 408. You post the invoice as normal, which gives the following accounting document:

You then clear the invoice against the down payment. The system takes into account the INR 204 of tax that you
have already withheld, and creates the following accounting document to clear the down payment against the
invoice, and clear the withholding tax account:

Accounts Receivable (FI-AR)


Purpose
The Accounts Receivable (FI-AR) component covers the most important laws and business practices specific to
India. The following documentation describes these aspects of the component. For generic information about FI-
AR, see Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable: Overview.

Features
Country Version India comes with a number of functions relating to withholding tax (see link below).

Extra fields are available in the customer master data for information required in India only.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 53 of 222

See also:

Withholding Tax

Customer Master (Withholding Tax Data)


Definition
The part of the customer master record where you record information about which taxes you have to withhold from
payments to a customer.

To access the customer master, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting →
Accounts Receivable → Master Records → …

For generic information about withholding tax data in the customer master, see Defining Liability to Tax and
Authorization to Deduct Tax.

Use
Enter the withholding tax types and withholding tax codes that the customer is liable to.

Enter the recipient type in the W/Tax No. (Withholding Tax Number) field.

See also:

Customer Master (Country Version India Data)

Customer Master (Excise Data)

Asset Accounting (FI-AA)


Purpose
The Asset Accounting (FI-AA) component covers the most important laws and business practices specific to India.
The following documentation describes these aspects of the component. For generic information about FI-AA, see
Asset Accounting (FI-AA).

Features

Country-Specific Functions

Country Version India comes with a report for calculating depreciation on asset blocks (asset groups) as required
by law for calculating a company's taxable income.

Country Template

The country template for India comes with the following settings:

z Chart of depreciation
z Depreciation keys as per the income tax laws

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 54 of 222

For more information, see the following documentation.

Year-End Income Tax Depreciation Report


Use
You use this report to calculate the depreciation on your assets and any capital gains or losses according to the
Income Tax Act.

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Accounting → Financial Accounting → Fixed
Assets → Information System → Reports on Asset Accounting → Taxes → Country Specifics → India → Year-End
IT Depreciation Report.

Prerequisites
You can use the Customizing settings delivered by SAP in order to configure Asset Accounting (FI-AA) with
respect to the income tax depreciation area and so that the report works correctly. For more information about what
settings to make, see the Release Note structure under FI → Release Notes from Country Version India Add-On →
Customizing Settings for Income Tax Act.

Features

Selection

Enter the asset numbers of your group assets and other selection data as required.

Output

The system:

z Calculates the depreciation on each asset block


z Calculates any capital gains or losses

If you deselect Test Run, the system also:

z Posts the depreciation to the income tax depreciation area


z Stores the capital gains amounts from the report in a table for your future reference.

Calculation of Depreciation
Use
The program calculates the depreciation on each asset block according to the Income Tax Act.

Features

Depreciation of Asset Blocks

The Income Tax Act requires you to depreciate all assets in blocks (in the SAP System, called asset groups). In

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 55 of 222

other words, you do not calculate the depreciation on each individual asset. Instead, an asset group has its own
net book value.

The asset block’s net book value increases when you add assets to it and falls when you sell or retire assets. You
also calculate depreciation on the block’s net book value. The depreciation rate depends on the asset block and is
prescribed by the government. Since an asset block may exist for a very long time, as you add new assets to it, it
has an unrestricted useful life.

For example, assume your company has four trucks. At the beginning of fiscal 20X1, the trucks have a total net
book value, for income tax purposes, of INR 300,000. At the end of the year, with no acquisitions and no
retirements, the net book value has not changed. The total depreciation on all of the trucks is 10% of INR 300,000,
or INR 30,000.

The total net book value of the block at the beginning of 20X2 is therefore INR 270,000.

New Assets Held for Less Than 180 Days

If you purchase an asset less than 180 days before the end of the fiscal year, you are only entitled to depreciate it
at half of the normal rate of depreciation. To continue the example, on 1 June 20X2 you sell a truck for IN 30,000.
On 31 March the following year, instead of posting INR 3,000 depreciation, you can only post half of that,
INR 1,500.

The system handles this requirement by taking half the acquisition cost and calculating depreciation on that.

Asset Retirements

When you retire an asset, you are not entitled to calculate any depreciation on it in that fiscal year at all.

Calculation of Capital Gains or Losses on Sales of


Assets
Use
The system automatically calculates any gains of losses on sales of assets according to the Income Tax Act. Any
gains or losses have to be taxed.

Features
If you sell an individual asset from a block, the value of the asset block goes down by the sale price. For example,
assume that you have an asset block of trucks. On 1 April 20X2, the trucks’ total net book value is INR 270,000.
On 1 February 20X3 you sell one of the trucks for INR 50,000. At the end of the year, the net book value before
depreciation is therefore INR 220,000.

Capital Gains

If the sale of an asset causes the value of the asset block to fall below zero, the amount below zero constitutes a
capital gain under the terms of the Income Tax Act. For example, on 1 April 20X3 the trucks’ total net book value is
INR 198,000. On 1 December you sell a truck for INR 210,000. On 31 March 20X4 the system determines the
asset block’s net book value as:

INR 198,000 – INR 210,000 = – INR 12,000

This makes a capital gain of INR 12,000, which the system stores in a table for your future reference.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 56 of 222

The following year, the net book value of the asset block is set to zero.

Capital Losses

If you sell all the assets in a block, but the block still has a net book value, the system posts this value as a capital
loss. For example, if you have a block with only one asset valued at INR 12,000, and you sell it for INR 10,000, the
net book value of the block is still INR 2,000, even though there are no assets in it.

The system stores the capital loss amount in a table for your future reference.

Materials Management (MM)


Purpose
The Materials Management (MM) component covers the most important laws and business practices specific to
India. The following documentation describes these aspects of the component.

Features
Country-Specific Functions
Country Version India comes with functions for calculating, posting, remitting, and reporting excise duty, and for
handling incoming and outgoing excise invoices.
For these purposes, extra fields are available in the vendor master data and material master data for information
required in India only.
Country Version India offers two ways of calculating excise duty, a condition-based method and a formula-based
method.
You can enter incoming excise invoices in the SAP system for goods receipts arising from external procurement,
subcontracting, and stock transfer. Excise clerks can capture incoming excise invoices using a dedicated
transaction, or, alternatively, warehousemen can capture them in the standard Goods Movement transaction,
MIGO, when they enter a goods receipt.
Finally, you can prepare copies of all excise registers for submission to the excise authorities.
Country Template
The country template for India comes with settings for calculating and posting all forms of taxes from MM, and with
the necessary document copying control settings.

Excise Invoice (Incoming)


Definition
A business document, in India, that your vendor sends you when it delivers excisable goods. It lists the goods and
states how much excise duty applies on them. Your use the excise invoice to claim back the excise that you have
paid from the excise authorities.

Use
When you procure goods externally, each delivery that your vendors make is accompanied by an excise invoice.
You have to post these in the system. This document is required as proof of the excise duty that you have paid, so
that you can then offset the duty against the excise duty that you levy on outputs.
You can capture and post excise invoices in one or two steps, depending on your business requirements.
• In the two-step procedure, the excise clerk captures the incoming excise invoice. This means that the clerk
enters the data, but the system does not yet create an entry in Part II of the appropriate excise register.
Another user (the excise supervisor) checks the excise invoice and posts it. The system then creates a Part
II entry.
• In the one-step procedure, the excise clerk captures and posts the incoming excise invoice simultaneously.
The system creates the Part II entry automatically.
Generally speaking, you have one excise invoice for each goods receipt, but see also Multiple Goods Receipts for

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 57 of 222

a Single Excise Invoice.

Structure
In the SAP system, the excise invoice consists of header data and line items. The header data comprises:
• An internal number
• The excise invoice number
• The date of the excise invoice
• The details of the original vendor who generated the excise invoice, if your vendor purchased the goods
from another vendor and was merely selling them on to you
At line item level, the excise invoice lists the materials on the excise invoice, showing the following information:
• Chapter ID
• Quantity of materials
• Excise duty base amount
• Rates of excise duty
• Amount of duty paid

Material Master (Excise Data)


Definition
The part of the material master record where you record excise information.

To access the material master, from the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics → Materials Management →
Material Master → Material → …

The excise data is displayed in a separate group box on the Foreign Trade: Import Data and Foreign Trade: Export
Data tabs.

Use

Customizing

In order for the users to be able to see the excise data group box, carry out the IMG activity in Customizing for
Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Master Data → Assign Users to Material
Master Screen Sequence for Excise Duty.

Vendor Master (Country Version India Data)


Definition
The part of the vendor master record where you record information about a vendor relating to sales tax, excise
duty, and withholding tax.

To access the vendor master, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management →
Purchasing → Master Data → Vendor → Central → ….

Use
When you have entered the vendor that you want to process, you can access the excise data from every screen,

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 58 of 222

by choosing CIN Details.

There are three separate tabs, one for each sort of tax.

If you prefer, you can also maintain this data in the Excise Rate Maintenance transaction (see Vendor Master
(Excise Data)).

Condition-Based Excise Determination


Use
When you enter a purchasing document, for example, a purchase order, the system automatically calculates the
applicable excise duties using the condition technique.

Features
The standard system comes with two tax calculation procedures. TAXINN is only supports condition-based excise
determination, whereas TAXINJ supports condition-based excise determination and formula-based excise
determination.
Both tax procedures contain condition types that cover all of the excise duties and sales taxes applicable.
Since the exact rates of excise duty can vary on a large number of factors, such as which vendor you purchase a
material from, or which chapter ID the vendor stocks the material under, you create condition records for every sort
of excise duty.
When you come to enter a purchasing document, the system applies the excise duty at the rates you have entered
in the condition records.

Activities
Customizing
Make the settings in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India →
Basic Settings → Excise Duties Using Condition Technique and … → Account Determination.
These activities include one activity where you define a tax code for condition-based excise determination.
Master Data
Create condition records for all excise duties that apply, and enter the tax code for condition-based excise
determination in each.
Day-to-Day Activities
When you enter a purchase order or other purchasing document, enter the tax code for condition-based excise
determination in each line item. The system then calculates the excise duties using the condition records you have
created.
When the ordered materials arrive, you post the goods receipt and the excise invoice. The system posts the excise
duty to the appropriate accounts for deductible input taxes when you enter the excise invoice.

Creating Condition Records for Excise Duty


1. In the command field, enter FV11 and choose .
2. Enter the condition type that you want to create a condition record for and choose .

The Key Combination dialog box appears.

3. Select the combination of objects that you want to create the condition record for.

On the dialog box, Control Code means "chapter ID."

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 59 of 222

So, for example, to create a condition record for a tax that applies to a combination of country, plant, and
chapter ID, select Country/Plant/Control Code.

4. Choose .
5. Enter data as required.

In the Tax Code field, enter the dummy tax code that you have defined.

6. Save the condition record.

Configuration of Tax Calculation Procedure TAXINN


Purpose
TAXINN is a tax calculation procedure for country version India and it supports condition-based excise
determination. You need to configure this tax calculation procedure.

Process Flow
Execute the following steps in the Implementation Guide to configure the tax calculation procedure TAXINN:
Procurement

Set up the following Access Sequences in the the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial
Accounting Global Settings → Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check Calculation
Procedure → Access Sequences:

{ JTAX

{ JST1

Set up the Condition Types for the following conditions in the IMG under Financial Accounting →
Financial Accounting Global Settings → Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check
Calculation Procedure → Define Condition Types:

○ MM Excise Conditions

ƒ JMOP IN: BED setoff %

ƒ JMOQ IN: BED setoff Qty

ƒ JAOP IN: AED setoff %

ƒ JAOQ IN: AED setoff Qty

ƒ JSOP IN: SED setoff %

ƒ JSOQ IN: SED setoff Qty

ƒ JMIP IN: BED inventory %

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 60 of 222

ƒ JMIQ IN: BED inventory Qt

ƒ JAIP IN AED inventory %

ƒ JAIQ IN AED inventory Qty

ƒ JSIP IN SED inventory %

ƒ JSIQ IN SED inventory Qty

ƒ JMX1 IN: A/P BED setoff

ƒ JAX1 IN: A/P AED setoff

ƒ JSX1 IN: A/P SED setoff

ƒ JMX2 IN: A/P BED inventor

ƒ JAX2 IN: A/P AED inventor

ƒ JSX2 IN: A/P SED inventor

ƒ JECP IN:A/P e-cess setoff

ƒ JECI IN: Eces inventory

ƒ JEX1 IN: A/P ecs setoffT

ƒ JEX3 IN: A/P ecs invT

○ LST/CST/VAT Conditions

ƒ JIPS IN Sales tax setoff

ƒ JIPC IN Central sales tax invoice

ƒ JIPL IN Local sales tax invoice

ƒ JIP5 A/P RM Deductible

○ Service Tax Conditions

ƒ JSRT A/P Service Tax

ƒ JEC3 A/P ECS for ST

Define the Tax Procedure according to the settings in the figures below.

You can do this in the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings →

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 61 of 222

Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check Calculation Procedure → Define


Procedures.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 62 of 222

Set up the following Account Key in the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting
Global Settings → Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check and Change Settings for
Tax Processing.

○ VS6 Input Tax

Assign Tax Procedure to the country.

You can do this in the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings →
Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Assign Country to Calculation Procedure.

Sales

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 63 of 222

Set up the Condition Types for the following conditions in the IMG under Financial Accounting →
Financial Accounting Global Settings → Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check
Calculation Procedure → Define Condition Types:

○ Excise Conditions

ƒ JASS IN A/R BED

ƒ JEXP IN A/R BED

ƒ JEXQ IN A/R BED

ƒ JEAP IN A/R AED %

ƒ JEAQ IN A/R AED Qty

ƒ JESP IN A/R SED %

ƒ JESQ IN A/R SED Qty

ƒ JCEP IN A/R CESS %

ƒ JCEQ IN A/R CESS Qty

ƒ JEXT IN A/R BED total

ƒ JEAT IN A/R AED total

ƒ JEST IN A/R SED total

ƒ JCET IN A/R CESS total

ƒ JECT IN A/R ECS total

○ LST/CST/VAT Conditions

ƒ JCST IN A/R CST

ƒ JCSR IN A/R CST Surcharge

ƒ JLST IN A/R LST

ƒ JLSR IN A/R LST Surcharge

○ Export Conditions

ƒ JFRE IN Frieght

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 64 of 222

ƒ JINS IN Insurance

Set up the Access Sequence in the the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting
Global Settings → Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check Calculation Procedure
→ Access Sequences:

Set up the following Pricing Procedures according to the settings in the figures below.

You can do this in the IMG under Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing
Control → Define And Assign Pricing Procedures.

○ JDEPOT (IN:Depot sale with formula)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 65 of 222

○ JEXPOR (IN:Export sales with formula)

○ JFACT (IN:Factory sale with formula)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 66 of 222

○ JSTKTR (IN:Stock transfer with formula)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 67 of 222

Formula-Based Excise Determination


Use
When you execute a business transaction involving materials that are subject to excise duty, the system
automatically calculates the duty for you.

Prerequisites
In order for the system to be able to determine which rate of excise duty to apply, you must have maintained all the
data on the Excise Rate Maintenance screen, which you can access from the SAP Easy Access screen by
choosing Indirect Taxes → Master Data → Excise Rate Maintenance.

You maintain the following types of data:

z Plant master data

You assign each of your plants an excise duty indicator. You can use the same indicator for all the plants
with the same excise status from a legal point of view, such as all those that are in an exempt zone.

See also the information about manufacturers that are only entitled to deduct a certain portion of the duty
(see Partial CENVAT Credit).

z Vendor master data

For each of your vendors with the same excise status from a legal perspective, you define an excise duty
indicator. You must also specify the vendor type – for example, whether the vendor is a manufacturer, a
depot, or a first-stage dealer. You must also stipulate if the vendor qualifies as a small-scale industry.

For each permutation of plant indicator and vendor indicator, you then create a final excise duty indicator.

z Customer master data

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 68 of 222

Similarly, you assign the same excise duty indicator to each of your customers that share the same legal
excise status.

Again, for each permutation of plant indicator and customer indicator, you then create a final excise duty
indicator.

z Material master data

Each material is assigned a chapter ID.

z Excise tax rate

For every chapter ID and final excise duty indicator, you maintain the rate of excise duty.

If your business only qualifies for partial CENVAT credit, you must customize your system accordingly.

Activities
Let us consider an example to illustrate how the system determines which rate of excise duty to apply to a material.
Assume you are posting a sale of ball bearings to a customer. The system automatically determines the rate of
excise duty as follows:

1. Looks up the customer master data to see what status you have assigned the customer.

Let's assume you've assigned the customer status 3.

2. Looks up the plant master data to see what status you have assigned the plant.

Similarly, your plant has status 2.

3. The system looks up the table under Excise Indicator for Plant and Customer to see what the final excise
duty indictor is for customer status 3 and plant status 2: It is 7.
4. The system determines the chapter ID of the ball bearing for the plant.

Let’s assume the chapter ID at plant for the ball bearings is 1000.01.

5. Finally, the system looks up the table under Excise Tax Rate to see what rate of duty applies to chapter ID
1000.01 under status 7.

Material Master (Excise Data)


Definition
The part of the material master record that contains information relating to Indian excise duty.

Use
In conjunction with other data, this data is used to calculate excise duty on various transactions.

To maintain the data, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Master Data → Excise Rate
Maintenance, and then select the following options described below.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 69 of 222

Structure
The excise part of the material master is divided into the following screens:

Chapter IDs

On this screen, you define the chapter IDs and corresponding descriptions as described in the excise tariff
structure. This information is used when you create excise invoices and is also shown in the various excise
registers.

Material and Chapter ID Combination

On this screen, you maintain the excise data relating to your materials. For each material, specify:

z Chapter ID
z Whether the material can be sent to subcontractors (see Subcontracting)
z The material type

This denotes, for example, whether the material is a raw material, a capital good – this affects the CENVAT
process – or if it is a finished good on which excise has been paid, to be covered by the Update of RG 1 and
Part I Registers.

z Whether you accept more than one goods receipt per excise invoice, and if so, whether the excise duty
should be credited to the CENVAT account immediately a goods receipt is posted (multiple credit) or not
until all the goods receipts have arrived (single credit) (see Multiple Goods Receipts for a Single Excise
Invoice)

This information is valid for a given plant. If the information is valid for all of your plants, however, leave the Plant
field blank.

Material Assessable Value

On this screen, you maintain the net dealer price and the assessable value of all materials that you send to
subcontractors or for any other issue. These values serve as the excise base value when the materials are issued,
and tell the system how much excise duty to reverse from your CENVAT account.

CENVAT Determination

On this screen, you specify which raw materials are used to produce which finished (or semifinished) goods. The
system uses this information to determine whether it you can claim a CENVAT credit for a material.

Excise Tax Rate

On this screen, you specify for each chapter ID every possible rate of excise duty that might apply, so you must
take into consideration each permutation of plant and customer; and each combination of plant and vendor.

You can maintain the basic excise rates in the following forms:

z Ad valorem
z Specific
z As a combination of both

For each rate, specify until which date it applies.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 70 of 222

You can also maintain the additional excise duty and special excise duty in ad valorem form, should any apply. If
you need to give these rates as a fixed sum, use the Quantity Based AED and SED screen.

Additional Excise Rate

On this screen, maintain any cess applicable.

Exceptional Material Excise Rate

On this screen, maintain any exceptions that apply to the excise rates that you have defined. Exceptions can apply
to a single material from all vendors, of to a single material from one vendor only. If you have an exceptional rate
for a customer–material combination, you can maintain it here as well.

Sales Tax Setoff Percentages

On this screen, maintain the percentage of local sales tax on inputs that you can deduct against LST on outputs.
The setoff amount is deducted from the inventory valuation of the material. Currently very few states, for example,
Maharashtra and Gujarat, participate in this scheme.

Vendor Master (Excise Data)


Definition
The part of the vendor master record that contains information relating to excise duty.

Use
In conjunction with other data, this data is used to calculate excise duty on various transactions.

To maintain the data, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Master Data → Excise Rate
Maintenance, and then select the following options described below.

Structure
The excise part of the vendor master is divided into the following screens:

Vendor Excise Details

On this screen, you enter your vendors' tax numbers, which are used for various forms of correspondence and
reports:

z Excise registration number (and the range, division, and collectorate in which this is located)
z Central sales tax (CST) number
z Local sales tax (LST) registration number
z Permanent account number (PAN)

In order for the system to be able to calculate which rate of excise duty to apply on purchases from the vendor, you
must also:

z Assign it a vendor excise duty status (for more information about how this works, see Determination of
Excise Duty Rates)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 71 of 222

z Specify what type the vendor is, for example, a manufacturer, first-stage dealer, or importer for 57AE returns

z If the vendor qualifies as a small-scale industry (SSI), you must also specify:

{ What its SSI status is (which you must first have defined under SSI rates, see below)
{ Whether or not it is participating in the CENVAT scheme

SSI Rates

On this screen, you define the excise rates that apply to purchases from vendors that qualify as SSIs. You define
one status for each band (or "slab") of sales volume provided for by the law, and for each SSI status, the rates of
excise duty that applies to that slab under the two schemes (see Excise Duty for Small-Scale Industries).

Excise Indicator for Plant and Vendor

On this screen, you define the final excise duty indicator (for more information about how this works, see
Determination of Excise Duty Rates).

Customer Master (Excise Data)


Definition
The part of the customer master record that contains information relating to Indian excise duty.

Use
In conjunction with other data, this data is used to calculate excise duty on various transactions.

To maintain the data, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Master Data → Excise Rate
Maintenance, and then select the following options described below.

Structure
The excise part of the customer master contains the following information:

Customer Excise Details

On this screen, you enter your customers' tax registration numbers, which are used for various forms of
correspondence and reports:

z Excise registration number (and the range, division, and collectorate in which this is located)
z Central sales tax (CST) number
z Local sales tax (LST) registration number
z Permanent account number (PAN)

In order for the system to be able to calculate which rate of excise duty to apply on sales to the customer, you must
also assign it a customer excise duty status (for more information about how this works, see Determination of
Excise Duty Rates).

Excise Indicator for Plant and Customer

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 72 of 222

On this screen, you define the final excise duty indicator (for more information about how this works, see
Determination of Excise Duty Rates).

Plant Master (Excise Data)


Definition
The part of the plant master record that contains information relating to Indian excise duty.

Use
In conjunction with other data, this data is used to calculate excise duty on various transactions.

To maintain the data, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Master Data → Excise Rate
Maintenance, and then select the following options described below.

Structure
The excise part of the plant master is divided into the following screens:

Excise Indicator for Plant

On this screen, you enter your plants' tax registration numbers, which are used for various forms of
correspondence and reports:

z Central sales tax (CST) number


z Local sales tax (LST) registration number
z Permanent account number (PAN)

In order for the system to be able to calculate which rate of excise duty to apply on purchases for this plant, you
must also assign it a plant excise duty status (for more information about how this works, see Determination of
Excise Duty Rates).

Excise Indicator for Plant and Vendor

On this screen, you define the final excise duty indicator (for more information about how this works, see
Determination of Excise Duty Rates).

Excise Indicator for Plant and Customer

On this screen, you define the final excise duty indicator (for more information about how this works, see
Determination of Excise Duty Rates).

Excise Duty for Small-Scale Industries


Use
Businesses that qualify as small-scale industries (SSIs – those with, for example, no more than two premises and
with a sales volume not exceeding an amount specified by the government) need to pay only reduced rates of
excise duty on their goods movements. The exact rate depends on the business's annual sales volume (see

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 73 of 222

below).

That means that when you make a purchase from an SSI, the system calculates a different rate of excise duty.
Note that SSIs are not required to pay additional excise duty or special excise duty.

Prerequisites
In order for the system to be able to calculate the correct rate of excise duty, you must have:

1. Defined the SSI statuses.

You define a separate SSI status for each of the various "slabs" (sales volume) (see Vendor Master (Excise
Data).

2. In the vendor master:

{ Assigned the vendor the SSI status that you have just defined.
{ If the vendor participates in the CENVAT scheme (see below), entered X (Vendor participating in
CENVAT scheme).

Features
As far as SSIs are concerned, there are two schemes. Under the first, an SSI can opt out of the CENVAT scheme.
In this case, they apply basic excise duty at certain flat rates on all transactions. These rates vary according to their
total annual sales.

An SSI with sales of less than INR 100,000 would not apply any excise duty; those earning up to
INR 400,000 would levy basic excise duty on all materials at 2%, and so on.

Under the second scheme, whereby an SSI participates in the CENVAT scheme, the SSI pays excise duty at a
percentage of the normal basic excise duty for the material in question. Again, this percentage depends on the
SSI's total annual sales.

Turnover (INR) Excise (%) SSI rate (% of excise) Effective SSI excise (%)

0–100,000 15 60 9

100,000–400,000 15 80 12

Configuration of Tax Calculation Procedure TAXINJ


Purpose
TAXINJ is a tax calculation procedure for country version India and it supports formula-based excise determination.
You need to configure this tax calculation procedure.

Process Flow
Execute the following steps in the Implementation Guide to configure the tax calculation procedure TAXINJ:
Procurement

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 74 of 222

Set up the Condition Types for the following conditions in the IMG under Financial Accounting →
Financial Accounting Global Settings → Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check
Calculation Procedure → Define Condition Types:

{ Excise Conditions

ƒ JMOD IN: A/R BED

ƒ JNED IN: A/R NCCD

ƒ JAED IN: A/R AED

ƒ JSED IN: A/R SED

ƒ JCES IN: A/R Cess

ƒ JECS A/R Educational CESS

○ LST/CST/VAT Conditions

ƒ JIN1 IN: A/R CST

ƒ JIN2 IN: AR LST

ƒ JIN4 IN: A/R CST Surcharge

ƒ JIN5 IN: AR LST Surcharge

ƒ JIN6 A/R VAT Payable

ƒ JIN7 A/R CST Payable VAT

○ Service Tax Conditions

ƒ JSE4 Service Tax

ƒ JES4 ECS on Service Tax

Set up the following Account Key in the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting
Global Settings → Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check and Change Settings for
Tax Processing.

○ VS6 Input Tax

Define the Tax Procedure according to the settings in the figures below.

You can do this in the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings →
Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check Calculation Procedure → Define

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 75 of 222

Procedures.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 76 of 222

Assign Tax Procedure to the country.

You can do this in the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings →
Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Assign Country to Calculation Procedure.

Sales

Set up the Condition Types for the following conditions in the IMG under Financial Accounting →

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 77 of 222

ncial Accounting Global Settings → Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check


Calculation Procedure:

○ Excise Conditions

ƒ JMOD IN A/R BED

ƒ JEX2 IN A/R BED

ƒ JAED IN A/R AED

ƒ JEXA IN A/R AED

ƒ JNED A/R NCC duty

ƒ JEXN A/R NCCD

ƒ JSED IN A/R SED

ƒ JEXS IN A/R SED

ƒ JCES IN A/R CESS

ƒ JCED IN A/R CESS

ƒ JECS IN A/R EDU-CESS

ƒ JECX IN A/R EDU-CESS

{ LST/CST/VAT Conditions

■ JIN1 IN A/R CST

■ JIN2 IN A/R LST

■ JIN4 IN A/R Surcharge

■ JIN5 IN A/R LST Surcharge

■ JIN7 IN A/R CST in VAT

■ JIN8 IN A/R LST – Value

{ Service Tax Conditions

■ JSE4 IN Service Tax

■ JES4 ECS on Service Tax

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 78 of 222

Set up the Condition Type UTXJ and assign the Access Sequence as JIND.

You can do this in the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting Global Settings →
Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check Calculation Procedure → Define Condition
Types.

Set up the following Account Key in the IMG under Financial Accounting → Financial Accounting
Global Settings → Tax on Sales/Purchases → Basic Settings → Check and Change Settings for
Tax Processing.

○ MW3 Sales tax 3

○ MWS Output tax

○ JN6 A/R VAT Payable

○ JN7 A/R CST Payable VAT

○ JN9 LST Value

○ JS6 A/R Service tax

○ JS7 A/R ECS on Service

Set up the following Pricing Procedures according to the settings in the figures below.

You can do this in the IMG under Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing
Control → Define And Assign Pricing Procedures.

○ JDEPOT (IN:Depot sale with formula)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 79 of 222

○ JEXPOR (IN:Export sales with formula)

○ JFACT (IN:Factory sale with formula)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 80 of 222

○ JSTKTR (IN:Stock transfer with formula)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 81 of 222

External Procurement (Domestic)


Purpose
This process illustrates how manufacturing plants can use the SAP system to procure excisable goods.
In addition to the standard procedure, you also have to capture and post the incoming excise invoice, and the
system creates the appropriate entries in the excise registers.

Process Flow

You create a purchase order for the goods you want and send it to the vendor.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 82 of 222

After a few days, the vendor sends you the goods together with an excise invoice.

When the goods arrive at your company, the warehouseman enters the goods receipt.

The system:

{ Creates a material document to record the goods receipt

{ Creates an accounting document to debit the inventory account and credit the GR/IR clearing
account:

{ Creates a Part I entry in register RG 23A or 23C

Note that if you first want to post the goods to blocked stock, for any reason, do so using the standard
procedure. The excise clerk then captures the excise invoice as normal.

The excise clerk captures the excise invoice.

For information about what to do if the vendor sends the goods in more than one delivery, see Multiple
Goods Receipts for a Single Excise Invoice.

The excise supervisor checks the excise invoice captured by the clerk, makes any changes necessary, and
posts it.

The system automatically debits the excise duty to the excise duty accounts and credits the CENVAT
clearing account:

It then creates a Part II entry in register RG 23A or 23C to record this posting.

You enter the vendor's invoice, following the standard procedure.

If the excise supervisor has reduced the amount of excise duty that is to be credited to the CENVAT
account, the system adds the difference to the material price.

The system also creates an accounting document. The document contains debit postings to clear the
clearing accounts for goods receipts and CENVAT; and a credit posting to create an open item on the
vendor's account:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 83 of 222

Alternatives
The above procedure is just one way of using the SAP system to handle incoming excise invoices. If your business
processes differ from the procedure described above, there are a number of alternatives available to you.

One-Step Procedure

In the procedure described above, the excise clerk captures the excise invoice and the excise supervisor posts it
(the two-step procedure). If you want, you can have one person perform both of these activities in a single step,
using the transaction under Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming Excise Invoice → Central
Processing → Capture/Change/Cancel/Display/Post.

Capture Excise Invoice and Goods Receipt Combined

Steps 2–3 involve two different system transactions (goods receipt and excise invoice capture). You can combine
these two steps one, if you wish, so that the warehouseman can capture the excise invoice at the same time as he
enters the goods receipt (see Goods Receipts and Incoming Excise Invoices Combined).
If you want, he can even capture and post the excise invoice at the same time.

Capture Excise Invoice Before Goods Receipt

In the procedure described above, the goods receipt is entered before the excise invoice. However, your business
processes may require you to capture the excise invoice before the goods receipt.
When the warehouseman enters the goods receipt, the system adjusts the material value for any changes to the
taxes that the clerk has made in the captured excise invoice. An accounting document to debit the inventory
account and credit the GR/IR clearing account is created.

Creating Purchase Orders


To create a purchase order, follow the standard procedure, but when you fill out the item information, enter the
following data on the Invoice tab:

z Enter a tax code.

If you do not, the system will not calculate excise duty or display it on the excise invoice create screen.

If you use condition-based excise determination, make sure you enter the tax code that you have defined for
this purrpose.

If you are only eligible for partial CENVAT credit, you must use an appropriate tax code. If the
CENVAT credit is less than the duty amount entered, the system will automatically add the difference
to the inventory value when you come to verify the invoice.

z Select GR-based IV, to activate goods receipt-based invoice verification. During invoice verification this will
enable the system to update the material value to allow for any discrepancies between the taxes in the

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 84 of 222

purchase order and the taxes stated by the vendor in the excise invoice.

The purchase order shows the excise duty and sales tax that you expect to pay. The taxes are calculated in the
purchase order according to the vendor, material, and tax code.

See also:

Condition-Based Excise Determination

Entering Goods Receipts


Use

In this procedure, you enter the goods receipts, following the standard procedure. In addition:

z You enter the number of the excise invoice, if it is available


z The system automatically creates an entry in Part I of the excise register RG 23A or RG 23C

This procedure only applies if the warehouseman is not entitled to enter excise invoices himself (see Goods
Movements and Excise Documents Combined).

Prerequisites
You have specified whether you want the system to create a Part I entry when you post goods receipts to blocked
stock, for stock transport orders, and to consumption stock. You do so in Customizing for Logistics – General, by
choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Maintain Excise Groups.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order.
2. In the top line, enter the purchase order number and choose .

A dialog box appears.

3. Enter data as required:

{ If you have not yet captured the excise invoice:

„ Leave the Excise Invoice field blank.


„ Fill out all of the other fields.

{ If you have already captured the incoming excise invoice, enter the excise invoice number.

4. To close the dialog box, choose .

If you choose , the system will not make an entry in Part I of the excise register, in which case you must
update the register later.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 85 of 222

5. Check that all the line items are correct, and adjust them as required.
6. Save the goods receipt.

Entering and Verifying Invoices


Follow the standard invoice verification procedure, but select Calculate tax on the Vendor Items screen. The
system proposes the deductible excise duty items in the invoice document.

External Procurement (Imports)


Purpose
This process shows you how to handle the countervailing duty (CVD) on imports, which is levied in place of excise
duty. Unlike other forms of customs duties, such as basic customs duty or special customs duty, you can credit
CVD paid on imports to your CENVAT account.

Prerequisites

Vendor Master Record for Customs Office

Create a vendor master record for the customs office, so that you can create liabilities for the CVD (see step 3 in
the process flow).

Condition Type for CVD

The system handles CVD using a condition type for planned delivery costs. Specify which condition type you use in
Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings →
Determination of Excise Duty → Excise Defaults.

For more information, see Planned Delivery Costs.

CVD Clearing Account

When you post CVD to a CENVAT account (see step 5 below), the system debits the CVD to the BED account and
credits it to a CVD clearing account.

Specify which G/L account you want to use as the CVD clearing account, in Customizing for Logistics – General,
by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Maintain Company Code Settings.

Process Flow
1. You create a purchase order for the goods that you want and sent it to the vendor.

For each material that you will have to pay CVD on when it comes through customs, you enter the CVD as a
pricing condition.

2. The vendor ships the goods to you.

When the goods arrive in India, they go through customs. The customs officers issue a bill of entry for the
goods, which is in effect an invoice for the CVD on the goods. Once they have inspected the goods, they
send them on to you.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 86 of 222

3. The goods arrive at your plant, together with the bill of entry. In order to record the bill of entry in the system:

a. The excise clerk enters an invoice for the bill of entry

In Accounts Payable (FI-AP), the system creates a new vendor item for the CVD at the customs
office. The item is offset to the CVD clearing account.

b. He then captures an excise invoice for the bill of entry

4. The warehouseman posts the goods receipt.


5. The excise supervisor posts the excise invoice.
6. The excise clerk enters the vendor invoice for the materials, following the standard procedure.

Creating Purchase Orders


Use
You follow this procedure to create a purchase order for imports.

Country Version India contains a sample pricing procedure for imports, JIMPOR.

Procedure

Create a purchase order for the materials that you want to order using the standard procedure, but when you fill
out the item information, make sure that you observe the following:

z Invoice tab

{ Enter a zero-rate tax code


{ Deselect GR-based IV

z Conditions tab

a. Select the countervailing duty (CVD) condition and choose .


b. In the Rate field, enter the rate of CVD that will be levied on the material when it arrives at customs.
c. In the vendor field, enter the vendor master record that you have created for the customs office.

Then, once the vendor has delivered the goods and you enter the invoice, the system will
automatically credit the CVD liability to the customs office.

Entering Invoices for Bills of Entry


To enter an invoice for a bill of entry, you follow the standard invoice verification procedure, but make sure you
observe the following:

Header Data

z Basic data tab

{ In the Amount field, enter the amount of countervailing duty (CVD) stated on the bill of entry in

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 87 of 222

rupees.
{ Do not enter any other taxes.

z Details tab

{ Assuming you specified in the purchase order that the CVD was to be paid to the customs office, the
system shows the customs office as the vendor. If not, enter the customs office’s vendor master
record in the Inv. party (Invoicing party) field.

Line Items

On the PO reference tab, enter data as follows:

1. Enter the number of the purchase order related to this delivery.

{ If you only created one purchase order for the goods, enter the purchase order number and select
Planned delivery costs.
{ If you sent more than one purchase order to the vendor and it sent you all of the ordered materials
together in one shipment:

i. Choose .
ii. Enter all of the purchase order numbers in the table.
iii. Select Planned delivery costs.
iv. Select Deliveries and deselect Returns.
v. Choose Adopt.

In both cases, the system displays the line items in the line item overview.

2. For each line item:

{ In the Amount field, enter the amount of CVD on the item (if you have more than one item, you may
have to work the amount out manually).
{ In the Quantity field, enter the quantity of goods on the invoice.
{ Enter a zero-rated tax code.

3. Choose Simulate.

A dialog box appears with a list of the postings that will be made to Financial Accounting (FI).

4. Choose Post.

Capturing Excise Invoices for Bills of Entry


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming
Excise Invoice → Individual Processing → Capture/Display.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Capture Excise Invoice


b. Select Purchase Order.
c. Enter the purchase order related to the bill of entry.
d. Choose .

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 88 of 222

A dialog box appears.

3. Enter the number of the invoice that you entered for the bill of entry and choose .
4. If you need to enter any other purchase orders, enter the number in the top line as for step 3.

Note that this time, you do not need to enter the invoice number.

5. Enter other data as required.

Note that the countervailing duty is displayed in the basic excise duty fields.

6. Save the excise invoice.

Entering Goods Receipts


Use

In this procedure, you record the receipt of the goods from the vendor abroad, following the standard procedure.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order.
2. In the top line, enter the purchase order number and choose .

A dialog box appears.

3. Enter the number of the excise invoice that you created for the bill of entry and choose .
4. If you need to enter more purchase orders – for example, if you sent the vendor more than one purchase
order and it sent you back all the ordered materials in a single delivery – for each purchase order, enter the
number in the top line and choose .
5. Check that the line items in the goods receipt are correct.
6. Save the goods receipt.

Result
The system creates:

z A goods receipt document


z An accounting document
z An entry for the goods receipt in Part I of the appropriate excise register

Posting Excise Invoices


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming
Excise Invoice → Individual Processing → Change/Display/Post/Cancel.
2. Select Post CENVAT and Vendor Excise Invoice.
3. Enter the number of the excise invoice that you created for the bill of entry.
4. Check that the data is correct.
5. Choose Simulate CENVAT.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 89 of 222

A dialog box appears with a list of the accounting entries that will be made to transfer the CVD from the
clearing account to the excise duty account.

To close the dialog box, choose .

6. If the data is correct, choose Post CENVAT.

The system posts the CENVAT and creates a corresponding entry in Part II or the appropriate excise
register.

Subcontracting
Use
If you work with subcontractors, there are two ways of handling the excise invoice on the goods that you provide
them with:

z Subcontracting without payment of excise duty


z Subcontracting under full payment of duty

Country Version India supports both of these approaches.

For information about the standard subcontracting procedure in the SAP System, see Subcontracting.

Subcontracting Without Payment of Excise Duty


Purpose
When you issue materials to a subcontractor, you need to keep track of what materials you have issued and when
they have to be returned by.

The reason for this close monitoring has to do with India’s tax law. Under excise law 57AC, when you send
materials to a subcontractor for processing, you are not required to pay any excise duty, even though the materials
have left your premises. However, if the materials have not been returned to you within a given length of time
specified by the law (in 2000, 180 days), you will have to reverse any excise credit that you posted when you
purchased the materials (see Completion, Reversal, and Recredit). In the case of materials that you have
manufactured in-house, you will have to post credit entries to the extent of the CENVAT rate of the assessable
value of the materials.

Prerequisites
You have made the Customizing settings in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods
Movements → India → Business Transactions → Subcontracting.

You have made the Customizing settings for the accounting postings in Customizing for Logistics – General, by
choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Account Determination.

You have set up the number range for the subcontracting challan in Customizing for Logistics – General, by
choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Tools → Number Ranges.

You have maintained the subcontracting information in the material masters (see Material Master (Excise Data)).

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 90 of 222

You have made the following settings in Customizing for Materials Management → Inventory Management and
Physical Inventory:

z Goods Issue/Transfer Postings → Define Screen Layout.

For movement type 541, in the Change View Field Selection Overview, pick the 541 movement type and in
the Select Group Materials Management, make the Purchase Order field an optional entry.

z Output Determination → Maintain Output Types


z Output Determination → Assign Forms and Programs
z Output Determination → Printer Determination → Printer Determination by Plant/Storage Location

Process Flow

1. You create a subcontract order for the goods that you want to subcontract.
2. You create a transfer posting order for the materials that are to be sent to the vendor. This document is,
however, for your own use only.
3. You create a subcontracting challan on the basis of the transfer posting order.

This is the consignment document that you will send to the subcontractor along with the materials that are to
be processed.

4. You send the materials to the subcontractor, along with a printout of the subcontracting challan.
5. The subcontractor processes the materials and returns the finished goods. When the goods are delivered
back to you, the storeperson posts the goods receipt and the challan.

The delivery may not necessarily cover all the goods from the challan: It may also include goods from a
number of different challans. The SAP functions allow for this eventuality.

6. The excise department reconciles the goods receipt against the challan, thereby accounting for the return of
the materials that you have sent for subcontracting.

The challans here include those that have been captured online at the time of goods receipt and those
entered manually.

7. You create a list of the outstanding challans.


8. You complete the challan.

If a subcontractor fails to return all the materials within the time allotted, you have to scrap the material by
specifying it as such in the bill of material for the parent material then assigning the bill of material to the
subcontracting purchase order. If the scrap generated is not returned by the subcontractor, excise duty
relevant to the scrap generated has to be paid. If this scrap is returned after the duty has been paid, an
excise journal voucher should be created to reverse the excise duty paid.

Alternatives

The procedure given in step 5 shows how to enter the goods receipt using the old Goods Movement transaction. If
you want to use the new Goods Movement transaction, MIGO, see Entering Goods Receipts and Subcontracting
Challans Together.

Subcontracting Challan

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 91 of 222

Definition
A document that you use to issue and track subcontracting work. It allows you to make sure that all the materials
you have sent to the subcontractor for processing are returned.

The challan is also widely known as the 57F4 challan, after the law under which it was defined up
until the 2000 budget. This law has now been superceded by a new one, 57AC.

Use
You create challans from transfer orders to accompany any materials that you send to subcontractors under rule
57AC. In this respect, they are an extended form of delivery note, with additional information about the excise duty
on each material that you have supplied. Materials that are not liable to excise duty do not have to be included in
the challan.

As the subcontractors return the finished goods to you, you record the returns in the challan, to make sure that all
are returned within the allotted time limit.

If the finished goods returned to you by the subcontractor are of substandard quality, you can also create a
subcontracting challan from the returns order.

Structure
The challan consists of a header and line items. The header, in addition to organizational data, allows you to enter:

z Preprinted number
z Additional data
z Identification marks
z Nature of processing

Furthermore, each challan has two numbers, an internal document number and a challan number, which the
system assigns to the challan when you save it. From a business perspective, this is the most important number.
Each challan also has a status, which shows you what stage in processing it is at.

The line items are copied across from the transfer posting when you create the challan. You can also enter
additional data for each item.

Processing Subcontracting Challans


To access the individual functions shown in the table, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes →
Procurement → Subcontracting → Subcontracting Challans → …

Function Follow-on menu path What you should know

Create a challan → Create. See Creating Subcontracting Challans

Print a challan → Create or See Printing Subcontracting Challans.


→ Change.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 92 of 222

Change a challan → Change. You can only change challans with the status Posted.

Furthermore, you can only change data that relates to


the challan printout. If you need to change accounting
data, you must delete the challan and create a new
one.

Cancel a challan → Change → . To save the cancellation, save the challan.

The challan status changes to Canceled.

Complete a challan → See Completing Subcontracting Challans.


Complete/Reverse/Recredit
The challan status changes to Completed.

Reverse the excise → See Reversing Excise Duty Credit.


duty credit Complete/Reverse/Recredit
The challan status changes to Reversed.

Recredit the excise → See Recrediting the CENVAT Account.


duty Complete/Reverse/Recredit
The challan status changes to Reversed/completed.

Reconcile quantities → Reconcile Quantity See Reconciling Quantities.

The challan status changes to Assigned/fully


reconciled.

Creating Subcontracting Challans


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes →
Procurement → Subcontracting → Subcontracting Challans → Create.
2. Enter the following data:

{ Material Document: The transfer posting document number


{ Material Document Year: The year that you created the transfer posting document
{ Excise Group
{ Series Group

3. Choose .

The system calculates the excise duty for the materials.

4. Specify which excise invoice the materials are from.

Once you have assigned the materials to an invoice, the system reads how much excise duty you have paid
on the materials that you are sending.

5. If you want to print the challan straight away, select Print immediately on the Posting tab.
6. Change the posting date, if necessary.

This is the date from which the system calculates the return due date. It is set by default to the day’s date.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 93 of 222

However, you can change it you need to.

7. Save the document.

Calculation of Excise Duty on Materials for Subcontractors


Use
When you send materials to a subcontractor for processing, you have to determine how much excise duty is
applicable. This of course depends on the base value. The different amounts of excise duty (basic excise duty,
special excise duty, and additional excise duty) are printed on the subcontracting challan.
Thus, when you create a subcontracting challan, the system determines the base excise value of each material
and the amount of excise due automatically.

Prerequisites
You have maintained the materials’ excise data (see Material Master (Excise Data)).

Features
When determining the excise duty for materials purchased from third parties, the system uses the excise rate
from the latest excise invoice for the material received from the vendor.
Where materials manufactured in-house are concerned, the SAP System determines the taxable value of the
material on the basis of the following information, in this order:

The latest excise invoice value for the material

The material's assessable value (that is, the price determined by an external auditor)

The material’s net dealer price (the material’s list price; the price at which you sell the material to
customers)

Selecting Excise Invoices


1. Select the material that you want to assign the excise invoices to and choose Excise invoice selection.
2. Select the excise invoice or invoices.
3. Choose .

Printing Subcontracting Challans


You can print a subcontracting challan when you create it, or if you need to print it later on, in the change
transaction.

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirec Taxes → Procurement → Subcontracting →
Subcontracting Challans → Change.
2. On the Posting tab, select Print Immediately.
3. Enter the number of the preprinted stationery, if necessary.

This number will be saved for future reference.

4. Save the challan.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 94 of 222

Reconciling Quantities
Use
Once a subcontractor has processed your materials and returned them to you, you match the items in the challan
against those that have been returned.

Prerequisites
You have posted the goods receipt (or any other material document) for the returned goods.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Subcontracting →
Subcontracting Challans → Reconcile Quantity.
2. Enter the following data:

{ In the Material Doc. and Mat. Doc. Year fields, enter the number of the goods receipt document and
the year in which it was created.
{ In the table below, enter the challan numbers and the years in which they were created.

If the material document is a goods receipt document with movement type 101, you can enter the
challans that were not captured when the goods receipt was posted. However, if all the relevant
challans were entered during goods receipt, they need not be entered here

3. Choose Reconcile.

A new screen appears. At the top is the information about the goods receipt (or other document); at the
bottom is the information from the challans that you have entered.

4. Specify which challans the materials in the goods receipt originated from:

{ If you have sent a subcontractor a number of different challans, all containing the same material, you
can automatically specify that the materials should come from the oldest challans first, by choosing
.
{ Otherwise, for each challan, enter manually the quantity of materials has been returned, and choose
to refresh the display.

5. Once you have accounted for all the materials in the goods receipt, save the challan.

Result
The system changes the challans' status as follows:

z If you have accounted for all of the materials in a challan, the system sets its status to Fully Reconciled. In
this case, you can complete the challan.
z If you have accounted for only some of the materials, it sets the status to Assigned. In this case, you must
assign the remaining quantity of materials to another goods receipt later on.
z Scrap generated is assigned to a challan only if the percentage component scrap is specified in the bill of
material for the parent material and this bill of material is assigned to the subcontracting purchase order.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 95 of 222

Deleting Assignments
Use
You follow this procedure if you have assigned the wrong challan to a goods receipt or other material document
(see Reconciling Quantities).

Prerequisites
You have:

z Assigned the challans to a goods receipts document


z Assigned the challans to a material document in quantity reconciliation
z Not completed or reversed the challans

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Subcontracting →
Subcontracting Challans → Reconcile Quantity → Delete Assignments.
2. Choose Delete Assignment.

Result
The assignments will be deleted. The challans will no longer be related to the material document until another
assignment takes place between the same.

Completion, Reversal, and Recredit


Use
You use this function to close a challan completely after all the materials have been accounted for. If a challan's
return date has elapsed, and thus your right to the CENVAT credit, you use it to reverse the excise credit – or,
should your subcontractor return the goods subsequently, to recredit the excise credit.

To access the function, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement →
Subcontracting → Subcontracting Challans → Complete/Reverse/Recredit.

Features
Exactly which function is available depends on the challan's status as follows:

Completion

You can complete a challan if you have accounted for all of the materials in it (and it thus has the status Fully
Reconciled). This prevents you from making any more changes to it.

Reversal of CENVAT Credit

If the allotted number of days elapses and the subcontractor has not returned some or any of the materials in the
challan (status: Posted or Assigned), you must reverse the excise duty that you have credited to your CENVAT

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 96 of 222

account. The scrap has to be returned by the subcontractor. If it is not returned, the excise duty for the scrap has to
be reversed.

This function sets the status to Reversed. From here, you have two options:

z If you do note expect the subcontractor to return the materials, you can complete it.
z If you do expect the subcontractor to return at least some of the materials, you can leave it as it is for the
time being. Then, when the materials arrive, you can recredit the excise duty to the account (see below).

Recredit

If a subcontractor returns materials after the return date, you can recredit the excise duty credit that you have
reversed.

Completing Subcontracting Challans


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Subcontracting →
Subcontracting Challans → Complete/Reverse/Recredit.
2. Enter the challan number and year.
3. Choose .
4. Select Complete Challan.
5. Save the challan.

Reversing Excise Duty Credit


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Subcontracting →
Subcontracting Challans → Complete/Reverse/Recredit.
2. Enter the challan number and year.
3. Choose .
4. Select Reverse Challan.
5. Save the challan.

Recrediting the CENVAT Account


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Subcontracting →
Subcontracting Challans → Complete/Reverse/Recredit.
2. Enter the challan number and year.
3. Choose .
4. Select either of the following options:

{ Take Recredit for Receipts

This leaves the challan open for further goods receipts.

{ Take Recredit If Any and Complete Challan

This completes the challan and writes off finally any CENVAT credit that you might have been able to
claim.

5. Save the challan.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 97 of 222

Making Transfer Postings


Use
You follow this procedure to create transfer postings, with or without reference to a purchase order.

Prerequisites
You have made the appropriate settings in Customizing for Materials Management, by choosing Inventory
Management and Physical Inventory → Goods Issue/Transfer Postings → Define Screen Layout.

In the Change View Field Selection Overview, select movement type 541 and mark the Purchase order field as an
optional entry.

Procedure

Follow the standard procedure (see the section Providing Components from Inventory Management). Note that
the movement type supplied with the standard system for transfer postings to stock for subcontractors is 541.

Posting Goods Receipts from Subcontractors


Use
When you post a goods receipt for a purchase order, you follow the standard procedure, but there are a couple of
extra dialog boxes in which you can enter the challan data, if any is available. If the delivery note does not show
the challan numbers, you can ignore the prompts to enter them.

Procedure
1. On the initial selection screen, enter data as follows:

{ Movement type

In the standard system, enter 101 for goods receipts for purchase orders into warehouse.

{ Purchase order
{ Plant
{ Storage location

2. Choose Adopt + details.

A dialog box appears, which is not relevant for subcontracting.

3. Choose .

Another dialog box appears.

4. Enter the challans from which the materials were supplied, if available.
5. Choose .

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 98 of 222

6. Enter the challan numbers and the years that they were created.
7. Choose .
8. Save the goods receipt.

List of Subcontracting Challans


Use
You use this report to create a list of subcontracting challans. Depending on what selection criteria you enter, you
can use it for finding out:

z Which challans are still with the subcontractor and are due back the following week
z Which challans you can make a recredit for
z Which challans have been entered for a goods receipt, but not reconciled
z Which challans' reference documents have been canceled
z Annexure IV

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement →
Subcontracting → Reports → Challan Listing.

Output

The system displays a list of the subcontracting challans that meet your selection criteria. For more information
about a particular challan, click it.

Subcontracting Under Full Payment of Duty


Purpose
This procedure illustrates how you use the system to send materials to your subcontractors for processing using
normal excise invoices.

Prerequisites
You have created a condition type for manually entering excise duty in the subcontract order. In the standard
system, you can use condition type JEXC.

Process Flow

The purchasing clerk creates a subcontract order for the subcontractor’s services.

The warehouseman creates a transfer posting for the materials that you want to send to the subcontractor.

The excise clerk creates an outgoing excise invoice for the materials.

You send the materials to the subcontractor, together with the excise invoice.

The subcontractor processes the materials and returns them to you, together with another excise invoice.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 99 of 222

The excise clerk captures the subcontractor’s excise invoice, using the purchase order as the reference
document.

The warehouseman enters the goods receipt.

The excise supervisor posts excise invoice.

The accounts payable clerk posts the subcontractor’s invoice.

Creating Subcontract Orders


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase
Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known.
2. Set the order type to Standard PO.
3. In the Vendor field, enter the subcontractor.
4. Fill out the Org. data (Organizational data) tab.
5. In the item overview, enter the line items as described in the standard procedure.
6. In the item details, on the Invoice tab:

{ Select GR-based IV (Goods receipt-based invoice verification)


{ Enter a zero-rate tax code

7. On the Conditions tab, enter the excise duty on the line item in the Condition value field for the manual
excise value condition (in the standard system, condition type JEXC).
8. Save the subcontract order.

Creating Excise Invoices for Subcontractors


Use
To create an outgoing excise invoice for the subcontracting materials, follow the standard procedure.

On the selection screen, in the Reference group box, enter the number of the transfer posting document as the
reference document. The reference document type is MATD (Material document).

Stock Transfer
Purpose
This process shows you how to order goods from another plant in your company, taking into account all of the
excise regulations. For information about the standard procedure, see Two-Step Procedure – Plant.

Prerequisites
Before you can start, set up customer and master records for both plants as follows:

1. Create a customer master record for the issuing plant.


2. Create a vendor master record for the issuing plant, and enter customer account number in the Customer
field on the Control screen.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 100 of 222

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the receiving plant.


4. Assign the plants to the customer master record in Customizing for Materials Management (MM), by
choosing Purchasing → Purchase Order → Set Up Stock Transport Order → Plants.

Process Flow

1. You create a stock transport order, following the standard procedure, and send the order to the issuing
plant.
2. The issuing plant has processes your order, and when it is ready to ship:

a. The storeperson at the issuing plant issues the goods using a transfer posting.
b. The excise clerk there creates an excise invoice
c. The excise supervisor verifies and posts the excise invoice.

It then sends the goods to you, together with the excise invoice.

3. Once the goods arrive, you follow the standard procedure for incoming excise invoices:

a. The excise clerk captures the excise invoice, using the stock transport order as the reference
document.
b. The storeperson enters the goods receipt, again using the stock transport order as the reference
document.

Alternatively, you can first enter the goods receipt and then capture the excise invoice.

4. The excise supervisor then posts the excise invoice.

Incoming Excise Invoices


Use
This transaction is mainly for use by excise clerks, so that they can capture incoming excise invoices, and excise
supervisors, who then post the excise invoices captured by the clerks.

To access the function, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise
Invoice → Incoming Excise Invoices → Individual Processing → Capture/Display for excise clerks or
Change/Display/Post/Cancel for excise supervisors.

Prerequisites
You have made the appropriate settings in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods
Movements → India → Business Transactions → Incoming Excise Invoices.

Integration
The function is an integral part of the procurement process in Country Version India and contains information
relating to material movements and taxes. As such it is integrated with Materials Management (MM) and Financial
Accounting (FI).

Any entries that the system makes in relation to an incoming excise invoice, in Parts I and II of the excise registers
RG 23A and 23C, are also shown in the transaction.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 101 of 222

Features
The screen consists of the following areas:

Top Line

This is where you specify what document you want to process. When you capture an incoming excise invoice, you
specify the reference document in this area. When you process an excise invoice that you have already captured,
you enter the excise invoice number.

Header Data

This area consists of four tabs, each with information that relates to the whole of the excise document.

Tab Use

Excise Invoice Basic header data that you would expect to find at the top of the excise invoice itself,
such as the excise invoice number and the date.

Totals Total amounts of different types of excise duty in the excise invoices.

Miscellaneous Information about the manufacturer of the goods, if different from the vendor that sent you
the goods, and about the manufacturer’s excise registration details.

You can also enter a serial number, if the excise invoice was printed on preprinted
stationery, or a rejection code, if you need to reject the invoice.

Additional Data Fields for any additional information that you might want to enter, according to your own
requirements.

Part II Any entries in Part II of the excise registers RG 23A or RG 23C.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 102 of 222

Note that this tab is not displayed if there are no Part II entries.

Item Overview

This area lists all of the items in the excise invoice. To process an item, you click the item number and process it in
the detail data , but you process the items in the detail data area.

Detail Data

This area consists of seven tabs, each with information about a particular item.

Tab Use

Item Basic information about the material itself.

Quantities Information the quantity of goods in the excise invoice, and how much of this quantity
have entries in Parts I and II of the excise registers.

Duty Rates The rates of excise duty on the item.

Duty Values The excise duty on the item, and how much of it has already been credited to the
CENVAT accounts.

Reference The other SAP documents associated with the item.


Documents

Additional Data Fields for any additional information that you might want to enter, this time at item level.

Part I, Part II Any entries in Part I or Part II of the excise registers RG 23A or RG 23C.

Reference Documents
Use
When you capture an incoming excise invoice, the first piece of information that you enter is the reference
document, in the top line.

Immediately you enter the reference document, the system copies all the appropriate header data and line items
from it into the excise invoice, so that there is less typing for you to do and less likelihood of making errors.

By specifying the reference document, you also ensure that the excise invoice is properly integrated into the SAP
document flow.

Features
There are two scenarios where you might be sent an excise invoice:

z External procurement, where a vendor sends you some goods accompanied by an excise invoice
z Stock transport orders, where another of your business’s plants sends goods to your plant, again,
accompanied by an excise invoice

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 103 of 222

Use in External Procurement

In the external procurement process, there are several types of documents that you can use as a reference
documents. You specify the document type in the top line.

If you have already posted a goods receipt for the deliver, use the goods receipt as the reference document in
preference to any other documents related to the delivery.

If the goods were delivered as the result of a purchase order, contract, or scheduling agreement but you have
not yet posted the goods receipt, use one of these documents.

When you use one of these documents, the system cross-checks all the data you enter in the excise invoice
against the master data and transaction data already at its disposal.

Fewer Cross-Checks

Alternatively, if you have a material document but for whatever reason you want fewer cross-checks, select Without
Purchase Order and enter the material document number.

The system still copies the data from the material document, but the cross-checks are less stringent.

No Reference Documents Available

If for any reason a vendor sends you a delivery and excise invoice for which you do not have any reference
documents, you can still capture the excise invoice, but you have to do it manually, so select Without Purchase
Order. Again, there are few cross-checks that the system can carry out.

For more information, see Capturing Excise Invoices Without Reference Documents.

Use in Stock Transport Orders

If your plant has created a stock transport order for materials to be sent from another plant, you select Stock
Transport Order.

Capturing Excise Invoices Using Reference Documents

Use
You use this procedure to capture incoming excise invoices using a reference document.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming
Excise Invoices → Individual Processing → Capture/Display.
2. Specify the reference documents.

3. Edit the excise invoice header data.


4. Remove any items from the item overview that you do not need.
5. Edit the items.
6. Save the excise invoice.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 104 of 222

If at any time you want to start over, choose .

Result
The system:

z Creates the excise invoice and assigns it an internal excise invoice number
z Sets the document status (on the Excise invoice tab) to In process

The excise supervisor then has to post the excise invoice in a separate step.

Specifying Reference Documents


1. In the top left-hand corner of the screen, in the top line, select Capture Excise Invoice.
2. In the next field, select the reference document type (for example, Goods Receipt or Purchase Order).
3. In the next field, enter the number of the reference document.

If you only want one of the line items from the reference document, enter the line item number in the
following field. Otherwise, leave the field blank.

4. Choose .

The system copies the relevant header data and items from the reference document into the screen.

5. If you need to specify another reference document – for example, if you sent the vendor two separate
purchase orders and it sent the ordered materials in one delivery with one excise invoice – repeat steps 1–
4.

This only applies to purchase orders, scheduling agreements, and contracts.

The system copies the additional line items into the screen.

Editing Header Data


Use
Once you have specified the reference documents, the next step in capturing the excise invoice is to edit the
excise invoice header data on the screen to match what is printed on the excise invoice itself.

Much of the header data is copied automatically from the reference documents, but some information you will have
to maintain manually.

Procedure
1. On the Excise invoice tab, enter the excise invoice number and date from the vendor’s excise invoice.
2. If the materials were supplied by a different vendor than the one in the purchase order, enter the vendor in
the Ship-from field on the Miscellaneous tab and choose .

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 105 of 222

The system changes the excise range, division, and ECC number accordingly.

This information shows who paid the excise duty on the materials. If your vendor has not manufactured the
materials itself, but has purchased them from another business, it will be the latter who has paid the excise
duty, not the vendor.

3. Choose Check to check the header data.

{ If the data is in incomplete or incorrect, the system displays a list of the problems.
{ If the data is all right, the traffic light on the Excise invoice tab turns green.

Removing Items from the Item Overview


Use
When you specify the reference documents, the system automatically enters all the line items from the documents.
However, there may be fewer items in the excise invoice than in the reference document. In that case, you have to
remove the excess items from the overview.

Procedure
1. In the item overview, mark the line items that are in the excise invoice as OK.
2. Choose Delete.

The system removes all of the items that are not marked as OK.

Editing Line Items


Use
Once you have specified the reference documents and have edited the line item overview, edit each line item to
make sure that the information on the screen matches the information in the vendor’s excise invoice.

Procedure
1. In the item overview, click the number of the item that you want to edit.

The system displays the item in the detail data and grays it out in the overview so that you cannot edit it
there.

2. In the detail data, check the quantities, duty rates, and duty values against the vendor’s excise invoice and
adjust the information in the system to match it if necessary.
3. Select Item OK.

When you save the excise invoice, the system only saves the items that you have marked as OK.

4. To check the item data to make sure that the system accepts it, choose Check.

{ If the data is in incomplete or incorrect, the system displays a list of the problems.
{ If the data is all right, the item’s traffic light in the item overview turns green.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 106 of 222

Capturing Excise Invoices Without Reference


Documents
Use
This procedure shows you how to capture an incoming excise invoice if you do not have any reference documents.

You can also follow this procedure if you do have a material document that you want to use as a reference
document, but you want the system to cross-check the excise invoice data against other master data or transaction
data less stringently than it normally would (for more information, see Reference Documents).

You commission a construction company build a new plant for you. The company purchases all the
materials it needs to build the plant, deals with all of the invoices and most of the other paperwork,
with the exception of the incoming excise invoices, which the law requires you to deal with yourself.
The subcontractor sends you all excise invoices accordingly and you capture them in the system
without any reference documents.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes →
Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming Excise Invoices → Individual Processing → Capture/Display.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Capture Excise Invoice.


b. Select Without Purchase Order.
c. If you have a material document, enter the material document number and choose . If you do not
have any reference documents, leave the field blank.

3. Enter the header data.


4. Enter the line items.
5. Save the excise invoice.

Result
Once you have saved the excise invoice, you treat it as you would any other excise invoice.

Entering Header Data


1. On the Excise invoice tab:

{ Copy the information from the vendor’s excise invoice into the following fields:

„ Excise invoice number


„ Excise invoice date
„ Vendor

{ Fill out the Excise group field.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 107 of 222

2. On the Miscellaneous tab, enter the following data:

{ If the vendor who sent you the excise did not manufacture the goods itself, but obtained them from a
different manufacturer, enter the manufacturer in the Ship-from field and choose Enter.
{ Change the excise range, excise division, and ECC number if they are incorrect.

3. Choose Check to check the header data.

{ If the data is in incomplete or incorrect, the system displays a list of the problems.
{ If the data is all right, the traffic light on the Excise invoice tab turns green.

Entering Line Items


1. On the Item tab, enter the following data:

{ Material
{ Plant

2. Choose .

The system:

{ Adds the line item to the item overview


{ Fills out the Material type, Description, and Chapter ID fields using the information from the material
master record

If you have not maintained a material master record for this material, no information will be displayed,
but you can enter it here manually.

3. On the Quantities tab:

{ Enter the item quantity and change the unit of measure, if necessary
{ Enter the quantity of goods still available for CENVAT credit

4. On the Duty values tab, enter the following data:

{ Excise base amount


{ Excise amounts

5. To check the item data to make sure that the system accepts it, choose Check.

{ If the data is in incomplete or incorrect, the system displays a list of the problems.
{ If the data is all right, the item’s traffic light in the item overview turns green.

6. To add a new item, choose and repeat steps 1–5.

Posting Excise Invoices


Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 108 of 222

Once the excise clerk has captured the excise invoice, the excise supervisor checks it to make sure that the data
has been entered correctly, and then posts the excise invoice.

If, however, there is a problem with the excise invoice and you need to reject it, see Rejection of Excise Invoices.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming
Excise Invoices → Individual Processing → Change/Display/Post/Cancel.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Post CENVAT.


b. Select Vendor Excise Invoice.
c. Enter the excise invoice number.

3. Choose .
4. Check the information in the system against the vendor’s excise invoice and adjust the information in the
system to match.

You must pay particular attention to the excise duty that is to be credited to the CENVAT accounts.

5. To check the CENVAT postings, choose Simulate CENVAT.

A dialog box appears with a list of the postings that will be made. The excise duty accounts will be debited,
and the CENVAT clearing account credited.

To close the dialog box, choose .

6. To post the excise invoice and make the CENVAT postings, choose Post CENVAT.

You can also save your changes without making any CENVAT postings by choosing .

Result
The system:

z Creates an accounting document to make the appropriate CENVAT postings


z Creates the corresponding entries in Part II of the appropriate excise register

Long Texts
Use
When you capture an excise invoice, you can enter notes relating to the excise invoice – for your own reference
only – as long texts.

Activities

Customizing

You define what sorts of long texts that you want to be able to enter in Customizing for Logistics – General, by

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 109 of 222

choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India → Tools → Long Texts.

You could define one long text for information about the bill of lading, and one for information about
the Part II entry.

Day-to-Day Activities

When you capture an excise invoice and you want to enter a long text for it, on the Additional Data tab, choose
Long Text.

In the dialog box, double-click the sort of long text that you want to enter, and type the text in the field next to it.

Rejection of Excise Invoices


Use
If a vendor sends you an excise invoice that as it stands is unacceptable – for example, if it is illegible or some of
the data is missing – you still post the excise invoice, but you assign it a rejection code.

Features
If you only capture an excise invoice, the rejection code does not have any effect on the excise invoice other than
to denote it as rejected in some way.

However, if you post an excise invoice, the rejection code controls whether the system creates a normal CENVAT
document or if it posts the excise duty to the CENVAT on hold account pending clarification of the invoice.

Activities

Customizing

Define the rejection codes in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements →
India → Business Transactions → Incoming Excise Invoices → Maintain Rejection Codes.

Day-to-Day Activities

To reject an excise invoice, set the appropriate rejection code.

If you want, the system puts the excise duty on hold. Then, once you have checked the excise invoice, you can
post the excise duty from the CENVAT on hold account to the excise duty accounts.

Rejecting Excise Invoices


Use
Follow this procedure to reject an excise invoice, if you still want to post the excise duty to the normal accounts.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 110 of 222

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming
Excise Invoices → Individual Processing → Change/Display/Post/Cancel.
2. In the top line:
a. Select Post CENVAT.
b. Select Excise Invoice Number.
c. Enter the excise invoice number.
3. Choose .
4. On the Miscellaneous tab, enter a rejection code that posts the excise duty to the normal accounts.
5. Choose Simulate CENVAT.

A dialog box appears, showing you that the system will debit the excise duty to the excise duty accounts
and credit it to the CENVAT clearing account.

To close the dialog box, choose .

6. Choose Post CENVAT.

Result
The system posts the excise invoice as normal. It:

z Posts the excise duty to the appropriate accounts


z Creates the appropriate entries in Part II of register RG 23A or RG 23C
z Changes the document status (on the Excise invoice tab) to Posted

Rejecting Excise Invoices with CENVAT on Hold


Use
Follow this procedure to reject an excise invoice and post the excise duty to a CENVAT on hold account, pending
the receipt of more information.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming
Excise Invoices → Individual Processing → Change/Display/Post/Cancel.
2. In the top line:
a. Select Post CENVAT.
b. Select Excise Invoice Number.
c. Enter the excise invoice number.
3. Choose .
4. On the Miscellaneous tab, enter a rejection code that posts the excise duty to a CENVAT on hold account.
5. Choose Simulate CENVAT.

A dialog box appears, showing you that the system will debit the excise duty to the CENVAT on hold
account and credit it to the CENVAT clearing account.

To close the dialog box, choose .

6. Choose Post CENVAT.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 111 of 222

Result
The system creates an accounting document to posts the excise to the appropriate accounts, but does not create
any entries in Part II of registers RG 23A or RG 23C.

If you display the excise invoice, you see:

z On the Excise invoice tab, the document status is In process


z On the Miscellaneous tab, there is a link to the accounting document

Once the vendor has provided you with the information you need, you can post the CENVAT on the rejected excise
invoice.

Rejection Accounting Document


Definition
An accounting document that the system creates when you reject an excise invoice with CENVAT on hold.

Use

Day-to-Day Activities

When you reject an excise invoice with CENVAT on hold, the system creates an accounting document to debit the
excise duty to the CENVAT on hold account and credit it to the CENVAT clearing account:

Posting CENVAT on Rejected Excise Invoices


Use
Follow this procedure if you have an excise invoice that you have rejected, with the CENVAT credit on hold, and
you now want to take the CENVAT credit.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming
Excise Invoices → Individual Processing → Change/Display/Post/Cancel.
2. In the top line:
a. Select Post CENVAT.
b. Select Excise Invoice Number.
c. Enter the excise invoice number.
3. Choose .
4. On the Miscellaneous tab, delete the rejection code.
5. Choose Simulate CENVAT.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 112 of 222

A dialog box appears, showing you what CENVAT postings will be made.

The system will credit the CENVAT on hold account, and debit the appropriate excise duty accounts.

To close the dialog box, choose .

6. Choose Post CENVAT.

Result
The system:

z Posts the CENVAT credit as normal


z Creates the corresponding entries in Part II of the appropriate excise registers.

Reversal Rejection Accounting Document


Definition
An accounting document that the system creates when you post the CENVAT on a rejected excise invoice, to
reverse the posting to the CENVAT on hold account.

Use

Day-to-Day Activities

When you post the CENVAT, the system creates an accounting document to debit the excise duty to the excise
duty accounts and credit it to the CENVAT on hold account:

Reversal of CENVAT Postings


Purpose
Assume you have posted a goods receipt and then posted the CENVAT on the excise invoice accordingly. Then it
transpires there is a problem with the goods and the goods receipt has to be reversed. Under excise laws, that
means you are no longer entitled to the CENVAT credit.

In the SAP System, therefore, you have to reverse CENVAT posting correspondingly.

Process Flow
1. You reverse the goods receipt.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 113 of 222

The system:

{ Creates a reversal document to cancel the goods receipt


{ Creates additional entries in Part I of the appropriate excise register to reverse the original entries
{ Changes the excise invoice document status to In process.

2. You reverse the CENVAT posting on the excise invoice.

The system:

{ Creates an accounting document to reverse the CENVAT postings


{ Creates a corresponding entry in Part II of the appropriate excise register

3. If your plant does not allow multiple goods receipts per excise invoice, you must also cancel the excise
invoice.

The system changes the excise invoice status to Canceled.

If, however, you do allow multiple goods receipts per excise invoice, you do not have to cancel it. If you
want, you can leave the excise invoice as it stands. Then, if you receive another delivery of goods for this
excise invoice, enter the excise invoice number when you post the goods receipt.

Reversing Goods Receipts


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Movement (MIGO).
2. In the top line:

a. Select Cancellation.
b. Select Material document.
c. Enter the number of the goods receipt that you want to cancel
d. Choose .

3. Flag all of the line items as OK.


4. Save the reversal document.

Reversing CENVAT Postings


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming
Excise Invoices → Individual Processing → Change/Display/Post/Cancel.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Post CENVAT.


b. Select Vendor Excise Invoice.
c. Enter the excise invoice number.
d. Choose .

3. Choose Simulate CENVAT.

A dialog box appears, showing which postings the system will make to reverse the CENVAT.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 114 of 222

To close the dialog box, choose .

4. Choose Post CENVAT.

Canceling Excise Invoices


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → Incoming
Excise Invoices → Individual Processing → Change/Display/Post/Cancel.
2. In the top line:
a. Select Cancel.
b. Select Vendor Excise Invoice.
c. Enter the excise invoice number.
d. Choose .
3. Save the excise invoice.

Goods Movements and Excise Documents Combined


Use
If your business processes require, your warehousemen can process the necessary excise documents (for
example, excise invoices or subcontracting challans) at the same time as they enter a goods movement, using the
standard Goods Movement transaction, MIGO.

Features
Users in manufacturing plants can use the transaction when they receive goods from external procurement,
goods transferred from another plant, or goods manufactured by subcontractors. They can also use the transaction
when they issue goods to be transferred to another manufacturing plant or depot, or when they send scrap to a
vendor.

Users in depots can use the transaction when they receive goods procured externally or transferred from a
manufacturing plant. They can also enter goods issues for sending scrap to a vendor.

In all the above scenarios, the transaction supports the one-step and two-step procedures.

Activities

Customizing

You activate this function for each excise group separately, in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing
Tax on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Excise Groups.

Day-to-Day Activities

When you run the Goods Movement transaction, the system displays an additional tab at header level for the
excise invoice header information, and one tab at item level for the excise invoice line item information. You then fill
out the data as required.

When you save the goods receipt or goods issue, the system also saves the excise invoice (either
captured/created or posted). It creates all appropriate excise register entries, material documents, and accounting
documents.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 115 of 222

Note that once you have entered an incoming or outgoing excise invoice using the standard Goods Movement
transaction, you can only process it further using the other excise invoice transactions.

One-Step and Two-Step Procedures


Use
You can customize the system so that the warehousemen can post the necessary excise documents duty (the one-
step procedure) or whether you want excise supervisors to do this (the two-step procedure).

Features
This function works slightly differently for manufacturing plants and depots.

Manufacturing Plants

When the warehouseman in a manufacturing plant enters a goods movement, he can only post an incoming or
outgoing excise invoice if you have made the appropriate Customizing settings (see below). If you want to follow
the two-step procedure, he can only capture incoming excise invoices and create outgoing excise invoices.

You can also customize the system so that the warehouseman can only post an excise invoice if he does not
change any of the excise data proposed by the system.

Depots

If you follow the one-step procedure, the warehouseman can post incoming excise invoices for goods receipts.

The only form of goods issue that the standard Goods Movement transaction supports is scrap, for which you do
not require an outgoing excise invoice. However, the warehouseman must assign the goods issue to the
appropriate folio numbers from the goods receipt (RG 23D selection. You can decide whether he can capture the
RG 23D selection or post it as well.

Again, you can customize the system so that he can only post the data if he does not change the data proposed by
the system.

Activities

Customizing

You can customize different procedures for each excise group.

Make the settings in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India → Basic
Settings → Maintain Excise Groups.

Day-to-Day Activities

When the warehouseman enters a goods movement, he can only capture (or create) and post the excise invoice if
you have authorized it for his excise group.

The excise supervisor follows the standard procedures for posting incoming excise invoices and posting outgoing
excise invoices that need to be posted.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 116 of 222

Entering Goods Receipts and Excise Invoices Together

Use
This procedure describes how warehousemen at manufacturing plants enter the receipt of goods procured
externally, together with the incoming excise invoice.

You follow the standard procedure, and in addition, you also enter the excise invoice details at header level and
item level.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order.
2. In the top line, enter the purchase order number and choose .
3. Enter header data as required, following the standard procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Invoice tab:

a. Set the excise action to Capture Excise Invoice or Capture & Post Excise Invoice.
b. Enter the official excise invoice number and the excise invoice date.

If you need to enter any more data, choose .

4. Enter line item data as required, again, following the standard procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Item tab, change the data so that it matches the vendor's excise invoice, if
necessary.

5. Save the goods receipt.

Result
If you set the excise action to Capture Excise Invoice, the system creates:

z A material document to record the goods receipt


z An accounting document to debit the inventory account and credit the GR/IR clearing account
z A Part I entry in register RG 23A or 23C

The next step is to post the excise invoice, for which you use the Incoming Excise Invoices transaction.

If you set the excise action to Capture & Post Excise Invoice, the system also creates:

z A Part II entry in register RG 23A or 23C


z A CENVAT accounting document

The next step is to post the vendor's invoice, when it arrives.

Entering Goods Receipts with Reference to Excise

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 117 of 222

Invoices
Use
This procedure describes how warehousemen at manufacturing plants enter the receipt of goods procured
externally if the excise clerk has already entered (captured or posted) the excise invoice using the Incoming Excise
Invoices transaction.

You enter the goods receipt, following the standard procedure, and in addition, you enter the excise invoice
number.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order.
2. In the top line, enter the purchase order number and choose .
3. Enter header data as required, following the standard procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Invoice tab:

a. Set the excise action to Only Refer Excise Invoice or, if you want to post the excise invoice, Refer &
Post Excise Invoice.
b. Enter the official excise invoice number and the excise invoice date.
c. Choose .

The system displays all the information from the excise invoice. You cannot change it.

4. Enter line data as required, again, following the standard procedure.


5. Save the goods receipt.

Result
If you set the excise activity to Only Refer Excise Invoice, the system creates:

z A material document to record the goods receipt


z An accounting document to debit the inventory account and credit the GR/IR clearing account.
z A Part I entry in register RG 23A or 23C

If the excise invoice that you referred to has not yet been posted, the next step is to post the excise invoice, for
which you use the Incoming Excise Invoices transaction. Otherwise, the next step is to enter the vendor's invoice,
when it arrives.

If you set the excise activity to Refer & Post Excise Invoice, the system also creates:

z A Part II entry in register RG 23A or 23C


z A CENVAT accounting document

The next step is to post the vendor's invoice, when it arrives.

Entering Goods Receipts Without Excise Invoices

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 118 of 222

Use
This procedure describes how warehousemen at manufacturing plants enter the receipt of excisable goods
procured externally if the excise invoice is not yet available.

You enter the goods receipt, following the standard procedure, and in addition, you also set the excise action as
appropriate. You can still create an entry in Part I of register RG 23A or RG 23C, but the excise invoice number will
be missing from it. It will be entered later on when the excise clerk captures the excise invoice.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order.
2. In the top line, enter the purchase order number and choose .
3. Enter header data as required, following the standard procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Invoice tab, set the excise action to Part I Only.

4. Enter line item data as required, again, following the standard procedure.
5. Save the goods receipt.

Result
The system creates:

z A material document to record the goods receipt


z An accounting document to debit the inventory account and credit the GR/IR clearing account
z A Part I entry in register RG 23A or RG 23C

However, the Part I entry is incomplete, as the excise invoice number is missing from it.

The next step is to capture (and post) the excise invoice, for which you use the Incoming Excise Invoices
transaction. When you do so, the system automatically links the excise invoice to the Part I entry.

Entering Goods Receipts for Nonexcisable Goods


Use
This procedure describes how warehousemen at manufacturing plants enter the receipt of nonexcisable goods.

You enter the goods receipt, following the standard procedure, and in addition, you also set the excise action as
appropriate.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order.
2. In the top line, enter the purchase order number and choose .
3. Enter header data as required, following the standard procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Invoice tab, set the excise action to No Excise Entry.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 119 of 222

4. Enter line item data as required, again, following the standard procedure.
5. Save the goods receipt.

Result
The system creates:

z A material document to record the goods receipt


z An accounting document to debit the inventory account and credit the GR/IR clearing account

That is the end of the procedure for nonexcisable goods.

Entering Goods Receipts and Subcontracting Challans


Together
This procedure describes how warehousemen at manufacturing plants enter the receipt of goods from subcontract
orders.

You enter the goods receipt, following the standard procedure, and in addition, you also enter the subcontracting
challan details at header level and item level.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order.
2. In the top line, enter the subcontract order number and choose .

A dialog box appears, which is not relevant for subcontracting.

3. Enter header data as required, following the standard procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Invoice tab:

a. Set the excise action to Refer Subcontracting Challan.


b. Choose .
c. Enter the subcontracting challan number and the fiscal year, and choose .

4. Save the goods receipt.

Result
The system creates a material document to record the transfer from stock of material provided to vendor to normal
stock.

The next step is to reconcile the subcontracting challan.

Entering Goods Issues and Excise Invoices for


Transport Orders

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 120 of 222

Use
This procedure describes how warehousemen at manufacturing plants issue goods for a stock transport order
placed by another manufacturing plant or depot.

You enter the goods issue, following the standard procedure, and in addition, you also enter the excise invoice
details at header level and item level.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Issue (MIGO).
2. In the top line, enter the purchase order number and choose .
3. Enter header data as required, following the standard procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Invoice tab:

a. Set the excise action to Create Excise Invoice or Create & Post Excise Invoice.
b. Enter any other data required.
c. If you have activated Immediate Utilization for the series group, choose . On the CENVAT
Utilization tab, specify which accounts you want to pay the excise duty from. Choose to close the
dialog box.

4. Enter line item data as required, again, following the standard procedure.

In addition, check the data on the Excise Item tab, and change it if necessary.

5. Save the goods issue.

Result
If you set the excise activity to Create Excise Invoice, the system creates:

z A material document to record the goods issue to stock in transfer


z An accounting document to debit the manufactured components in stock account at the issuing plant and
credit the same account at the receiving plant
z A Part I entry in register RG 23A or 23C
z An entry in register RG 1 (if you have customized the excise group accordingly, and if the goods are finished
goods)

The next step is to post and print the excise invoice.

If you set the excise activity to Create & Post Excise Invoice, the system also creates:

z A Part II entry in register RG 23A or 23C


z A CENVAT accounting document

The next step is to print the excise invoice.

Entering Goods Receipts and Excise Invoices Together


at Depots

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 121 of 222

Use
This procedure describes how warehousemen at depots enter the receipt of goods and the incoming excise invoice
for:

z Goods transferred from a manufacturing plant


z Goods purchased from a vendor

Follow the standard procedure, and in addition, enter the excise invoice details at header level and item level.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Receipt → For Purchase Order → GR for Purchase Order.
2. In the top line:

a. Set the reference document to Purchase Order.


b. Enter the stock transport order number or the purchase order number.
c. Choose .

3. Enter header data as required, following the standard procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Invoice tab:

a. Set the excise action to Create RG 23D Entry.

If you have already entered a partial goods receipt for these goods and have entered the excise
invoice already, select Create RG 23D Entry for Existing Excise Invoice.

b. Enter the official excise invoice number and the excise invoice date.

If you have already entered the excise invoice, the system displays the information from the excise invoice
created at the manufacturing plant. You cannot change any of the information at header level or item level.

Otherwise, enter header data as required.

4. If you have not yet entered the excise invoice, enter line item data as required, again, following the standard
procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Item tab, change the data so that it matches the vendor's excise invoice, if
necessary.

5. Save the goods receipt.

Result
The system creates:

z A material document to record the goods receipt


z An accounting document to debit the inventory account and credit the GR/IR clearing account.
z An entry in register RG 23D

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 122 of 222

Entering Goods Issues and Excise Invoices Together at


Depots
Use
This procedure describes how warehousemen at depots issue scrap and assign the goods issue to the appropriate
folio number from RG 23D.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Goods Issue (MIGO).
2. In the top line, set the reference document to Others.
3. Enter line item data as required, including the material and plant, and choose .

In the header, the Excise Invoice tab appears, and in the detail data, the Excise Item tab appears.

On the Excise Item tab, the system displays a list of goods receipts of this material that you have already
entered, together with their folio numbers. The list is in chronological order. You can overwrite the proposed
quantities.

4. Enter header data as required, following the standard procedure.

In addition, on the Excise Invoice tab:

a. Set the excise action to Only Select RG 23D.


b. Enter any other data required.

5. Save the goods issue.

Result
The system creates:

z A material document to record the goods issue


z An accounting document to credit the inventory account
z An entry in register RG 23D to record the goods issue

Multiple Goods Receipts for a Single Excise Invoice


Use
Under normal circumstances, your vendors send you one excise invoice per delivery. Sometimes one excise
invoice covers more than one delivery, for example, if you order a large quantity of oil and the vendor requires
several trips to complete the delivery.

Prerequisites
You have specified the maximum number of goods receipts per excise invoice per excise group, and whether you
want multiple goods receipts with single or multiple CENVAT credits. You do so in Customizing for Logistics –
General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Maintain Excise Groups.
You have also specified which materials multiple goods receipts are allowed for. If you do not, the system will
display a warning for each material when you come to post the excise invoice (see Material Master (Excise Data)).

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 123 of 222

Features
The system allows you to control:
• Which of your excise groups allow multiple goods receipts (see above)
• Which materials you allow multiple goods receipts for (see above)
• When to credit the excise duty on the goods to your CENVAT account, either:

{ As soon as the accounts supervisor has verified and posted the excise invoice, irrespective of whether
the delivery has been made in full

{ Whether to wait until the full quantity has been delivered

You have ordered a consignment of INR 800,000 worth of fuel from a vendor with excise duty at
INR 80,000. The vendor sends the fuel in two batches. When the first batch arrives, the warehouseman
posts the goods receipt for INR 400,000 (plus INR 40,000 of duty); the excise supervisor does not post
the excise invoice for the quantity delivered. When the second batch arrives, you can credit INR 80,000
to your CENVAT account.

Activities
Working with multiple goods receipts entails the following activities:
• Posting goods receipts

When you post a second (or third, or fourth) goods receipt for an excise invoice, the system prompts you
to confirm that this is correct.

• Posting excise invoices

When you come to post an excise invoice, the system displays all the receipts created for the invoice. If at
material level multiple credit is disallowed, the system prompts you to confirm that you want to accept
the credit. Otherwise, you can credit the CENVAT account for each receipt separately.

Capital Goods
Use
Businesses are allowed to set off excise duty on purchases of capital goods against excise duty on outputs.
However, unlike with raw materials, you can only set off half of the duty in the first year, and the rest in any year
after that.

Prerequisites
In the material master, you have classified the capital goods as such.

Because duty on capital goods is handled using excise transaction type CAPE, you must also have specified that
you want this transaction to credit the excise duty to the CENVAT on hold account. You make this setting in
Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Account
Determination → Specify Excise Accounts Per Excise Transaction.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 124 of 222

You must then have specified which G/L account is the CENVAT on hold account, again in Customizing for
Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Account Determination → Specify G/L
Accounts per Excise Transaction.

Features
When you post an excise invoice that contains capital goods, the system posts half of the excise duty to your
CENVAT account and posts the rest to a G/L account for CENVAT on hold.

In following years, you can use a report to identify the capital goods with excise duty on hold and transfer the duty
to the CENVAT account (see Transfer of CENVAT Credit on Capital Goods).

Activities
When working with excise invoices that include capital goods, note the following:

z Capturing vendor excise invoices

When you create an excise invoice with capital goods, you have to set the material type to A (assets), C
(consumables), or T (tools).

z Posting excise invoices

When you come to post the excise invoice, the system posts only half of the excise duty to the CENVAT
account. The system does not round the amount off.

Transfer of CENVAT Credit on Capital Goods


Use
You use this report to display a list of the vendor excise invoices where the vendor has levied excise duty but you
have not posted it (in full) to your CENVAT account.

This is particularly useful in the case of capital goods, in order to find out how much credit remains from previous
years.

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise
Invoice → Reports → Balance Credit for Capital Goods.

Selection

On the selection screen, enter:

z Organizational data
z Data of the documents that you want

Output

The system displays a list of excise invoices with excise duty outstanding. It shows you:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 125 of 222

z The total amounts of the various types of excise duties levied on the excise invoice
z How much duty has still to be posted to the CENVAT account

Select the excise invoices that you want and choose Transfer credit. If you want to transfer only a portion of the
remaining amount, enter this amount as the amount to be credited.

The system creates an accounting document to post the duty to the CENVAT account and creates an entry in the
Part II register.

Excise Registers
Use
The excise authorities require you to maintain a number of registers relating to excise duty. They have to be printed
out monthly and shown to the authorities in the event of an audit. The SAP system makes all the entries for these
registers automatically, and you can prepare copies of them as and when necessary. Alternatively, you can
download the data for processing by non-SAP software.

Features
The SAP system handles the following excise registers:
• Register RG 1
• Register RG 23A and 23C, Parts I and II
• Register RG 23D
• Personal Ledger Account (PLA)

This is the bank account from which you transfer any money owing to the excise authorities.

• Register RT-12

This is a monthly report that summarizes the CENVAT and PLA information from the other registers.

Activities
For information about how to create the registers, see Creation of Excise Registers.

Register RG 1
Definition
A register of excisable finished goods kept by manufacturing plants. The register shows goods movements from
the factory to a store specifically for excisable finished goods.

Use
The SAP system generates all the necessary entries in the register, and to prepare a copy of the register.
Set the material type to Finished Goods in the material masters that you use for finished goods.

Register RG 1 Entries
Use
The SAP system creates all register RG 1 entries automatically.

Features
In most cases, the system does not generate an RG 1 entry at runtime. It generates any missing entries when you

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 126 of 222

execute the Register Update program (see below).


It assigns all entries a serial number.

Activities
Customizing
If you want the system to generate entries for goods issues entered using the standard Goods Movement
transaction, MIGO, specify in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements →
India → Basic Settings → Maintain Excise Groups.
Day-to-Day Activities
The system does not automatically generate entries for goods receipts from production orders. You have to
generate these yourself (see below).
Nor does it generate entries for goods issues, except for goods issues entered using the Goods Movements
transaction if you have made the Customizing settings described above.
Periodic Processing
Generate the missing entries once a day using the Register Update program.
Reporting
Prepare a copy of the register as described under Creation of Excise Registers.

Register RG 23A/23C
Definition
A record of receipts and issues of excisable materials, as kept by manufacturing plants. The register consists of
two parts:
• Part I shows the quantities of the materials.
• Part II shows the amounts of excise duty on the materials, and how much you have transferred to the
CENVAT accounts.
Previously, manufacturers were required to keep two separate registers, RG 23A and RG 23C for raw materials
and capital goods respectively. This is no longer the case, but the distinction still remains in the system.

Use
The system generates all the necessary entries in the register. You can prepare a copy of the register as required.

Part I Entries
Use
The SAP system creates Part I entries for all excisable goods movements.

Activities
Day-to-Day Activities
When you enter a goods receipt for excisable materials, the system automatically asks you if you want to create
the Part I entry in Register RG 23A or RG 23C. If so, the system generates a Part I entry. If not, it does not, but you
can generate all missing Part I entries later.
The system automatically enters the excise invoice number in the Part I entry. If the excise clerk has already
captured the excise invoice when the warehouseman enters the goods receipt, the system enters the excise
invoice number in the Part I entry immediately. If the warehouseman enters the goods receipt before the excise
clerk enters the excise invoice, the Part I entry does not contain a link to the excise invoice number. However, the
system updates the excise invoice number automatically when the excise clerk captures the excise invoice later
on.
The system does not automatically generate Part I entries for goods issues of excisable materials, with two
exceptions:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 127 of 222

• When you enter a goods issue for vendor returns


• When you enter a goods issue for stock transport orders for plants, but only when you use the Goods
Movements transaction
Periodic Processing
Generate the missing entries once a day using the Update of Registers RG 1 and RG 23 (Part I) program.
Reporting
Prepare a copy of the registers as described under Creation of Excise Registers.

Part II Entries
Use
Whenever you – as a manufacturing plant – post an incoming excise invoice, or create an outgoing excise invoice,
the system automatically creates an entry in Part II of the appropriate register (RG 23A or RG 23C).

Features
The system assigns all Part II entries a serial number, and creates an accounting document for each, to transfer
the various types of excise duty to the appropriate CENVAT account.

Activities

Day-to-Day Activities

The system only creates a Part II entry when you post an incoming excise invoice. It does not create one if you
only capture an excise invoice. That way, you can ensure that excise clerks can capture excise invoices but cannot
make any Part II entries. The excise supervisors can then check and post the excise invoices posted by the clerks.

Similarly, the system also creates a Part II entry when you post an outgoing excise invoice.

Reporting

All Part II entries are shown when you prepare the excise registers.

CENVAT Document
Definition
An accounting document that the system automatically creates when it generates a Part II entry.

Use

Customizing

Specify which document type you want the CENVAT documents to use, in Customizing for Logistics – General,
by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Maintain Company Code Settings.

Day-to-Day Activities

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 128 of 222

When the system generates a Part II entry for an incoming excise invoice, it creates a CENVAT document to debit
the excise duty to the excise duty account, and credit it to the CENVAT clearing account:

The excise duty is cleared from the clearing account when the accounting clerk enters the vendor invoice.

When the system generates a Part II entry for an outgoing excise invoice, it creates a CENVAT document to debit
the excise duty to the excise duty account, and credit it to the CENVAT suspense account:

Register RG 23D
Definition
A record of receipts and issues of excisable materials, as kept by depots.

Use
In procurement, when the warehouseman posts a goods receipt, the system creates a register entry.
In sales, when a sales clerk creates a sales order, he has to specify which excise invoices were delivered with the
goods that are being sold. Then, when the warehouseman posts the goods issue, the system generates another
register entry.
The system generates all the necessary entries in the register. You can prepare a copy of the register as required.

Register RG 23D Entries


Use
The system creates RG 23D entries for all receipts of excisable materials, and when you enter a goods issue, you
specify which RG 23D entries the goods came from originally.

Activities
Day-to-Day Activities
When you enter a goods receipt for excisable materials, the system generates a Part I entry in Register 23D.
The system creates one entry for each goods receipt, each of which is numbered with a serial number. Each entry
contains a separate line item for each material in the goods receipt, and each line item has its own folio number.
When you enter a goods issue, you have to specify which folio numbers are associated with it. Again, each entry
has its own serial number. The excise duty associated with these items is then added to the customer invoice.
Reporting
Prepare a copy of the registers as described under Creation of Excise Registers.

Example

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 129 of 222

A purchasing clerk places an order with a vendor. When the warehouseman enters the goods receipt, the system
generates the appropriate RG 23D entry automatically, as follows:

The RG 23D entry contains a separate line item for each material in the goods receipt, and each line item has its
own folio number.

Later that day, a second lot of goods is delivered. Again, the warehouseman enters the goods receipt in the
system, and the system creates the RG 23D entry automatically.

This is the second RG 23D entry, so the serial number is 0002. The folio numbers start at the next available
number, in the example, 004.

Later on, a sales clerk enters a sales order. When the excise clerk selects the RG 23D entries to go with the goods
issue, the system generates the following RG 23D entry:

Serial Numbers
Use
The system automatically numbers all entries in the following registers with a serial number:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 130 of 222

z RG 1
z RG 23A and RG 23C, Parts I and II
z RG 23D
z PLA

Each excise group defines its own number range intervals.

Use

Customizing

Set up the number ranges in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements →
India → Tools → Number Ranges.

Day-to-Day Activities

Whenever the system creates a register entry, it automatically assigns it a serial number.

Reporting

The serial numbers are shown in the excise registers when you prepare them.

Creation of Excise Registers


Purpose
You follow this procedure to create the excise registers.

Process Flow
1. You update register RG 1 and the Part I registers daily.

This report updates any missing data for the RG 1 register, and Part I of the RG 23A and RG 23C registers.
Its main purpose is to update the issue information in the Part I register, which is not otherwise tracked by
the system.

2. When you need to submit the registers, you run the Data Extraction report, and the system saves the data to
an internal table.
3. You run the Register Printout report, which reads the data from this table and prints it out.

Update of Registers RG 1 and RG 23 (Part I)


Use
You use this report to update the information in the following registers:

z RG 1
z RG 23A, Part I
z RG 23C, Part I

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 131 of 222

This report only creates register entries for goods movements that have not already been entered. It does not
create duplicate entries.

You cannot print or display these registers using this report. It is solely for the purpose of updating the
registers. Instead, to download the registers, use the Download Register Data report

Prerequisites
You have specified in the material master data which materials are to be entered in register RG 1.

For each of these materials, you have maintained the material form in table J_2IRG1BAL as below. Do not make
any entries in fields that are not listed below:

Field Field entries

EXGRP Material’s excise group

DATUM Date from which RG1 report is required, normally the date of going live

MATNR Material

FORM Enter P (Packed) or L (Loose). Do not leave this field blank.

WERKS Leave this field blank.

OP FN UOM Leave these fields blank.

OP BN UOM All quantities in this table are updated in the base unit of measure of the material.

CB FN UOM

USNAM User ID of the person filling out the table.

CPUDT Date of entry

CPUTM Time of entry

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Registers → Excise Tax →
Update RG 23A/C Issues and RG 1.

Selection

On the selection screen, you specify:

z Which documents you want to cover:

{ Enter general organizational details in the Company details group box.


{ Enter details about the documents that you want to include in the register, in the Document header
and Document details group boxes.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 132 of 222

z Which register you want to update, in the Registers group box


z Whether you want to run the program in batch mode

You can also check what date the data was last extracted.

Output

The system displays a list of material documents that have not yet been entered in the register.

1. Select the documents that you want to add to the register.


2. To check if there is enough stock in the specific excise group for the register for issues or receipts, select
the line items and choose Simulate.

We recommend that you use this option before proceeding; it will show the line items that can be updated in
the register.

Issues and receipts are handled separately based on the following register and classification code
combinations:

Register Type Goods issues Goods receipts

RG 23A IIM ROP

IPD

IWD

RG 23C IIM ROP

IPD

IWD

RG 1 IDH RMA

IDE ROP

IWE

IWT

IWO

{ Lines that can be updated in the register will be shown with a green traffic light, while those which are
not eligible (for example, if there is not enough stock on hand) will be marked with a red traffic light.
{ You can reselect the required line items and repeat the Simulate process.

3. Select the line items you want and choose Register entry.

The system updates the Part I or RG 1 tables with the material documents.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 133 of 222

For RG 1 issues to sales, wherever there is an excise invoice it is picked up and used for RG 1
updating.

The same option can be used for creating entries in RG 23A or RG 23C Part I registers. While
creating entries in the register, system will pick up only those material documents for which Part I
posting has not been done yet.

Data Extraction
Use
You use this report to extract the data in order to create the excise registers (see Creation of Excise Registers).

Prerequisites
You have entered the closing balance of the RG23A Part II, RG23C Part II, and PLA registers in table
J_2IACCBAL, as they were on the day prior to your extracting the register data.

Assume you want the extract the registers from 1 January 2001. You have to maintain the closing
balances in the table J_2IACCBAL as on 31 December 2000.

You make the entries in table J_2IACCBAL as described below:

Field Entry

EXGRP Excise group of the registers

REGISTER Type of register

Make an entry for each of the following:

z RG23ABED
z RG23ASED
z RG23AAED
z RG23CBED
z RG23CSED
z RG23CAED
z PLABED
z PLASED
z PLAAED
z PLACESS

DATUM Date of the closing balance

WERKS Leave this field blank

OP BAL Leave this field blank

CL BAL Closing balance in the register

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 134 of 222

EXAMT Leave this field blank

EXIND Leave this field blank

USNAM User ID of the person making the entries

CPUDT Date of entry

CPUTM Time of entry

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Tax → Registers → Excise Tax →
Extract.

Selection

On the selection screen, enter data as follows:

z If you select All registers, the system will create an extract for all registers. If you only want to create an
extract for specific registers, select Select any register and then the registers that you want.
z If you want to find out when an extract was last created, select Last extracted dates. The system then
displays the information in a dialog box.

Output

The system extracts the data. You can now print it out using the Register Printout report.

Register Printout
Use
You use this report to print out your excise registers.

Prerequisites
Before you can print a register, you must have extracted the data.

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Tax → Registers → Excise Tax → Print
Utility Program.

Selection

On the first selection screen, you specify which excise register you want.

On the second selection screen, you specify:

z Which excise group and plant are to be covered

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 135 of 222

z Which period of time is to be covered


z Whether you want the debit entries to the accounts to be shown individually or consolidated for each day

Output

The system prints out the registers.

Download Register Data


Use
You use this report to download data from the registers listed below onto your hard drive. The information is saved
in flat file format and can then be processed by non-SAP software to produce registers. This solution is thus an
alternative to that described under Creation of Excise Registers.

This report covers the following registers:

z RG 1
z RG 23 A and RG 23 C (Parts I and II)
z PLA
z Plant excise details

You can only download data once.

Prerequisites
Before you can download the data for registers RG 1 and RG 23, you must have updated them (see Update of RG
1 and Part I Registers).

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Tax → Registers → Excise Tax → Data
Download.

Selection

On the selection screen, specify:

z Which data you want to download (in the Register to be downloaded group box)
z Which documents are to be included (by document date and excise group)
z The location and name of the file that you want to save the information in (in the File name field)

Output

The system saves the data in a file on your hard disk. For information about how the files are structured, see:

z RG 1
z RG 23A and C, Part I and Part II

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 136 of 222

z RG 23D
z Plant excise details

Data Structure of Part I


Definition
The table below shows the data structure of the file that the system creates when you download the data from Part
I.

Structure

Field Length Use

REGTYP 1 Register

A RG23A

C RG23C

TRNTYP 4 Transaction type (GRPO = goods receipt)

EXGRP 2 Excise group

SNO 10 Part I serial number

SYEAR 4 Year of serial number

PDATE 8 Posting date

MAKTX 40 Material description

MENGE 13 Quantity

MEINS 3 Unit

EXNUM 10 Excise invoice number

EXDAT 8 Excise invoice date

NAME1 35 Vendor name

ORT01 35 City

PSTLZ 10 Pin code

EXCCD 20 Excise code number of vendor

EXCRN 20 Excise registration number of vendor

EXCRG 40 Excise range number

EXCDI 20 Division number

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 137 of 222

EXCCO 20 Excise collectorate of vendor

CHAPID 12 Chapter ID

P2NO 10 Corresponding Part II entry number

RISIND 1 Receipt/issue indicator

STATUS 1 Entry status

U Undeclared material

D Deleted item

MBLNR 10 Material document number

MJAHR 4 Material document year

BWART 3 Movement type

Data Structure of Part II


Definition
The table below shows the data structure of the file that the system creates when you download the data from Part
II.

In case of Part II entries for debit and credit (except for capital goods), if the excise invoice contains
multiple chapter IDs, then the excise value per chapter ID is shown in the lines immediately following
the Part II entry. These entries have the same Part II serial number. Only the fields REGTYP,
TRNTYP, EXGRP, SNO, SYEAR, EXNUM, EXDAT, BED, SED, AED, CESS, CURR, and CHAPID
will have valid values.

In case of the Part II credit entries for capital goods, after the Part II entry, the excise amount is
shown per excise invoice. These entries have the same Part II serial number. Only the fields
REGTYP, TRNTYP, EXGRP, SNO, SYEAR, EXNUM, NAME1, ORT01, PSTLZ, BED, SED, AED,
CESS, CURR will have valid values.

Structure

Field Length Use

REGTYP 1 Register type

A RG23A

C RG23C

P PLA

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 138 of 222

TRNTYP 4 Transaction type

57CM 57F4 completion

57FC 57F4 subcontractor goods issue

57NR Non receipt of 57F4

CAPE Capital goods

CEIV Canceling the generated excise


invoice

DIEX Differential excise posting

DLFC Factory sale and stock transfer

GRPO Goods receipt (raw material)

MRDY Reversal without reference

MRRD Reversal in case of consumption


other than production

MRWO CENVAT reversal for write of cases

TR6C PLA account adjustment through TR6


challan

OTHR Excise paid on other movements

EWPO Excise invoice without PO

EXGRP 2 Excise group

SNO 10 Part II serial number

SYEAR 4 Year of the serial number

PDATE 8 Posting date

EXNUM 10 Excise invoice number

EXDAT 8 Excise invoice date

NAME1 35 Vendor/customer/subcontractor name

ORT01 35 City

PSTLZ 10 Pin code

EXCCD 20 Excise code number of vendor/customer/subcontractor

EXCRN 20 Excise registration number of vendor/customer/subcontractor

EXCRG 40 Excise range number (in case of credit entries)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 139 of 222

EXCDI 20 Division number (in case of credit entries)

EXCCO 20 Excise collectorate of vendor/customer/subcontractor

BED 19 BED

SED 19 SED

AED 19 AED

CESS 19 CESS

CURR 3 Currency

CHAPID 12 Chapter id

P1NO 10 Corresponding part I entry number (in case of credit entries)

PREPRN 10 Preprinted excise invoice number

CVDIND 1 CVD indicator (X = CVD)

EXPIND 1 Export indicator in sales

Blank Local sale

B Export under bond

D Deemed export

N Export without bond

CAPIND 1 Capital goods indicator

A Assets

T Tools

C Consumable

CERTNO 20 (Capital goods only) Field use depends on material type:

Assets Installation certificate number

Consumable Intimation document number

Tools Intimation document number

CERTDT 8 Intimation/certificate date (capital goods only)

ANLN1 12 Asset number (for capital goods: assets only)

REMARKS 50 Remarks

PROCES 50 Process for subcontracting challan

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 140 of 222

STATUS 1 Status

Space Normal

R Reversed

RDOC1 10 Reference document number

RYEAR1 4 Reference document year

LIFNR 10 Vendor number

MBLNR 10 Material document number

MJAHR 4 Material document year

Data Structure of RG 23D


Definition
The table below shows the data structure of the file that the system creates when you download the data from RG
23D.

Structure

Field Length Use

INDCTR 1 Receipt/issue indicator

I Issue

R Receipt

EXNUM 10 Supplier's excise invoice number

EXDAT 8 Supplier's excise invoice date

NAME1 35 Vendor/consignee name

ORT01 35 City of vendor/consignee

PSTLZ 10 Pin code

EXCCD 20 Excise code number

EXCRN 20 Excise registration number

EXCRG 40 Excise range number

EXCDI 20 Division number

EXCCO 20 Excise collectorate

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 141 of 222

MAKTX 40 Material description

MENGE 13 Quantity

MEINS 3 Unit

CHAPID 12 Chapter ID

BED 19 BED

SED 19 SED

AED 19 AED

CURR 3 Currency

VBELN 10 Invoice (delivery document)

PDATE 8 Invoice date

NAME1B 35 Name of buyer

ORT01B 35 City of buyer

PSTLZB 10 PIN code of the buyer

Data Structure of Plant Master Data


Definition
The table below shows the data structure of the file that the system creates when you download the plant master
data.

Structure

Field Length Use

WERKS 4 Plant code

NAME1 30 Plant name 1

NAME2 30 Plant name 2

STRAS 30 Street and house number

PFACH 10 Post office box

PSTLZ 10 Postal code

ORT01 25 City

LAND1 3 Country

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 142 of 222

EXCCD 20 Excise code number

EXCRN 20 Excise registration number

EXCRG 40 Excise range number

EXCDI 20 Division number

EXCCO 20 Excise collectorate

Data Structure of RG 1
Definition
The table below shows the data structure of the file that the system creates when you download the data from RG
1.

Structure

Field Length Use

MANDT 3 Client

EXGRP 2 Excise group

SYEAR 4 Year of the serial number

SERIALN 10 RG 1 serial number

MBLNR 10 Number of a material document

MJAHR 4 Year of material document

ZEILE 4 Item in material document

BWART 3 Movement type (inventory)

MATNR 18 Material number

MENGE 7 Quantity

MEINS 3 Base unit of measure

MAKTX 40 Material description

RISIND 1 Receipt/issue indicator

DOWNL 1 Download indicator

DECLRD 1 Item declared for excise

EXPIND 1 Export type

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 143 of 222

REASON 40 Reason for movement

RDOC1 10 Reference document 1

RYEAR1 4 Reference year 1

RIND1 1 Reference document type 1

BEDRATE 3 Basic excise duty rate

AEDRATE 3 Additional excise duty rate

SEDRATE 3 Special excise duty rate

EXCUR 5 Currency

EXBAS 7 Base value for excise calculation

EXBED 7 Basic excise duty

EXAED 7 Additional excise duty

EXSED 7 Special excise duty

CESS 7 Cess amount

STATUS 1 Register entry status

USNAM 12 Created by

CPUDT 8 Document entry date

CPUTM 6 Time of entry

AEDAT 8 Changed on

AENAM 12 Changed by

Monthly Return
Use
The central excise authorities have by vide notification no: 2000-(N.T) dated 28th April, 2000, prescribed the form
of monthly return under rule 57AE of the central Excise Rules, 1944.

The SAP System offers you a report with which you can prepare the necessary printouts. It covers both of the
following:

z Annexure

This is a list of all the invoices and bills of entry for which you have made a Part II credit posting over the
past month. For each document, it shows the information required by the authorities.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 144 of 222

z Abstract

This is a summary of the excise information from the annexure.

Prerequisites
You have maintained the vendor types in the vendor master data, so that they can be are shown on the list.

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Registers → Excise Tax →
CENVAT Register.

Selection

On the selection screen, enter data as follows:

z Organizational data
z Posting dates of the documents to be covered
z Whether you want to print the annexure or the abstract

If you want to print the annexure, you must also specify whether the report is required for inputs or for capital
goods. If you want to print the abstract, the details are printed for both inputs and capital goods.

Depot Quarterly Returns Report


Use
Depots (registered dealers) are required by law to submit a CENVAT return at the end of each quarter of the
financial year. The return contains details about the excise duties on deliveries and issues of goods, as recorded in
register RG 23D.
The return is due on the 15th of the month after the end of the quarter. For example, for the quarter ending 30
June, you must submit the return by 15th July.
The system offers a report that you can use to print out a return. To access the report, on the SAP Easy Access
screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Registers → Excise Tax → Depot Quarterly Returns Report.

ER1 Report (J2IER1)


Use
The Government of India vide Notification No 26/2005-Central Excise (N.T.) prescribed the form E.R.-1 to be filled
with excise authorities, by all the assessees (as defined under Central Excise Act) on a monthly basis for
production and removal of goods and other relevant particulars and CENVAT credit.
You can run the report for a plant for a particular month. The system displays and prints the various sections of the
form for a Registration Number of a plant for a particular month.

Activities

To access the report, run transaction J2IER1.

Enter the selection criteria. This is based on the Excise Group, Plant and a particular month.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 145 of 222

Enter the Last Utilization Period. This is the period during which the excise duty credit has been used
for the particular month. If you do not specify a period here, the system reads the last utilization period.

You can enter the General Ledger Account Number for the different service taxes. If you enter the
Account Number, the system checks the amount against that service tax and prints it on the header of
the form.

Select the section of the form that you want to display and print. For a complete ER1 reporting, you must
print all the sections.

Supplier Self-Services
Purpose
The Supplier Relationship Management (SRM) component covers the most important laws and business practices
specific to India. The following documentation describes these aspects of the component.
The Indian tax laws require that excise duty should be paid by the buyer when the goods leave the vendor’s site.
Vendor needs to review the applicable taxes in the purchase order. Whenever a vendor dispatches the material, an
Excise Invoice should accompany the goods. To enable these enhancements, additions have been made to the
following functions of Materials Management system:
● Purchase Order or Scheduling Agreement Processing
● Excise Invoice Capturing After an Inbound Delivery is Created

Purchase Order or Scheduling Agreement Processing


Use
This function allows you to transfer the tax and pricing data to the Supplier Self-Service (SUS) system when the
purchaser creates or changes a Purchase Order or a Scheduling Agreement.

Prerequisites
While processing a Purchase Order, in order to populate the pricing condition in segment E1EDP05 of IDoc
ORDER02, you must create a view, using transaction WE32, for IDoc ORDERS02 and make the segment
E1EDP05 as mandatory.
The processing function module IDOC_OUTPUT_ORDERS then populates the segment E1EDP05.
Only those tax and pricing conditions marked with X for print in tax and pricing procedures are passed to the SUS
system.

Features
● To transfer tax and pricing data to the Supplier Self-Service (SUS) system, following new segments are
added to the ORDERS02 IDoc (new Purchase Order) and ORDCHG IDoc (changed Purchase Order):

{ E1EDP04for tax data

{ E1EDP05for pricing data

● The function module IDOC_OUTPUT_ORDERS has a BADI MM_EDI_ORDERS_OUT. The BADI has a
Method - PROCESS_IDOC_SEGMENT. This method calls the Pricing Function Module, which populates the
tax and pricing data into the IDoc segments.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 146 of 222

The IDoc is then transferred to the adapter in the XI system.

● In XI, the tax and pricing information that are populated in E1EDP04and E1EDP05segments of the
ORDERS02 IDoc have to be mapped to structures of Message Type PurchaseOrderRequest. In XI, the
structures for tax and pricing do not exist. Hence, in order to do the mapping, corresponding data types are
defined.

In Integration Repository (Design), there are additions of data types and data type enhancements.

These data type enhancements become a part of PurchaseOrderItem as an extension and can be used
for mapping.

● The adapter converts the IDocs into XML messages and sends them to the Supplier Self-Service system.

Excise Invoice Capturing after an Inbound Delivery of the ASN


Use
When the vendor creates an Advance Shipping Notification (ASN) in the Supplier Self-Service (SUS) system, there
is an Inbound Delivery in the system of the purchaser.
The purchaser can capture the Excise Invoice with respect to the Inbound Delivery in the following ways:
• The purchaser can configure the system to automatically run the transaction J1IEX with Vendor and Plant
combination, whenever there is an Inbound Delivery of ASN.
• The purchaser can manually capture the Excise Invoice in the following ways:

○ Using transaction J1IEX with respect to Inbound delivery number of the ASN.

○ Using transaction MIGO for capturing the Goods Receipt with respect to the Inbound delivery number
of the ASN.

The system defaults all excise invoice details from SUS. If the excise invoice has already been captured
automatically, these transactions do not allow the capture of the vendor excise invoice.

The IDoc for Inbound Delivery is DELVRY01.

Sales and Distribution (SD)


Purpose
The Sales and Distribution (SD) component covers the most important laws and business practices specific to
India. The following documentation describes these aspects of the component.

Features

Country-Specific Functions

Country Version India comes with functions for calculating, posting, and remitting excise duty:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 147 of 222

z The system determines the excise and other taxes on your sales.
z You can create outgoing excise invoices, customized to your own requirements, and make the appropriate
accounting postings.
z The system offers functions for domestic and export sales from factories and depots, including exports
under excise regulations.
z All goods movements are recorded in the appropriate excise registers, including register RG 23D.
z You can remit the excise duty using the delivered functions.

Country Template

The country template for India comes with sample pricing procedures, including all taxes, and settings for
automatic account determination to the appropriate excise accounts.

Excise Invoice (Outgoing)


Definition
A business document, in India, that you prepare when you issue excisable goods from a manufacturing plant, for
example:
• To be sold to a customer
• To be transferred to another of your plants
The excise invoice lists the goods that you have issued and states how much excise duty applies. Your customer
uses the excise invoice to claim back the excise that it has paid from the excise authorities.

Use
In the system, there are three different procedures for creating excise invoices
• Sales direct from the factory

This procedure is for when you sell manufactured goods straight from the factory at which they were
produced, in which case you levy excise duty when the goods leave the factory on their way to the
customer.

If, when you send the goods to the customer, you enclose the commercial invoice, you create the excise
invoice with reference to the commercial invoice. If you want to send the commercial invoice after you
have dispatched the goods, however, you create the excise invoice with reference to a pro forma
commercial invoice. For more information about these procedures, see Sales from Factories.

As well as creating excise invoices individually, you can also create them in batches (see Creation of
Excise Invoices in Batches).

• Sales from depots

A depot is a site at which the goods are stored, away from the factory at which they were produced. In
this procedure, you have to levy the excise duty when you transfer the goods from the factory to the
depot, and then make sure this is passed on to the customer when it makes a purchase. For more
information, see Sales from Depots.

• Sales (other goods movements)

Some other goods movements may also require you to create an excise invoice with reference to other
documents. The system offers separate functions for these purposes (see Other Outward Movements).

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 148 of 222

Structure
Numbering of Excise Invoices
Outgoing excise invoices have two numbers: an internal document number, which is assigned immediately you
create an excise invoice; and an excise invoice number, which is not assigned until you have verified and posted it.
As far as the excise invoice number is concerned, you have to number your outgoing excise invoices in sequential
order, starting each year on 1 April. You must notify the excise authority of the jurisdiction of the invoicing location.
The serial number must be printed on each page of the excise invoice.
Each number range is governed by a series group. You must create at least one series group in order to be able to
number the excise invoices. If you need more than one number range, you must create the corresponding number
of series groups. You do so in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements →
India → Basic Settings → Maintain Series Groups.
Number of Line Items Per Excise Invoice
Some states allow you to include only a limited number of items for each page of an excise invoice (for example, if
the excise invoices are to be printed on prenumbered forms). You can customize the system so that it prints the
excise invoice accordingly, in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements →
India → Basic Settings → Maintain Excise Registrations.

Customer Master (Country Version India Data)


Definition
The part of the vendor master record where you record information about a vendor relating to sales tax, excise
duty, and withholding tax.

To access the vendor master, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution →
Master Data → Business Partners → Customer → ….

Use
When you have entered the customer that you want to process, you can access the excise data from every screen,
by choosing CIN Details.

There are three separate tabs, one for each sort of tax.

If you prefer, you can also maintain this data in the Excise Rate Maintenance transaction (see Customer Master
(Excise Data)).

Pricing
Use
When you create a sales document, the system automatically determines the price of the goods you are selling,
including any excise duties and sales taxes.

Features
Country Version India comes with four pricing procedures as follows:

z JINFAC (Sales from manufacturing plants)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 149 of 222

z JINEXP (Export sales)


z JINDEP (Sales from depots)
z JINSTK (Stock transfers)

These pricing procedures determine the net price (or the assessable value, if there is one) and then calculate all
forms of excise duties and sales taxes on the goods.

Excise Duties

For each form of excise duty, there are three separate condition types as follows:

Excise duty Ad valorem Specific Total*

Basic JEXP JEXQ JEXT

Additional JEAP JEAQ JEAT

Special JESP JESQ JEST

Cess JCEP JCEQ JCET

* These condition types show, for example, the total basic excise duty on the goods (ad valorem duty plus specific
duty). It is the values in these condition types that the system uses in follow-on documents.

All of these condition types are discount surcharge conditions and are posted using the accounting key EXD.

The excise conditions are determined using the access sequence JEXC. This access sequence contains the
following condition tables, so that you can create excise condition records for all of the following combinations:

Table Conditions

362 Country, chapter ID*

357 Country, plant, chapter ID

358 Country, plant, chapter ID, material

371 Country, plant, chapter ID, ship-to party

369 Country, plant, chapter ID, customer tax classification

372 Sales organization, reference document and item

* The chapter ID is stored in the control code field. When you enter a material's chapter ID in the material master,
the system copies the chapter ID to the control code field. When you create a condition record, the field name is
control code.

If you want to create condition records for different types of customers, for example, those that qualify for
concessional tax rates and those that don't, you can define customer tax classifications in Customizing and create
condition records for each classification.

Sales Taxes

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 150 of 222

For central sales tax and local sales tax, there are two condition records each, one for the basic tax (JCST and
JLST respectively), and one for surcharges (JCSR and JLSR). These are all tax conditions and are posted with the
account key MWS or MW3. When you create a condition record for the sales taxes, you must specify a tax code
that you want the tax to be posted under in Financial Accounting (FI).

The system determines the central sales tax using the access sequence JCST, and local sales tax using the
access sequence JLST. Both access sequences use the following condition tables:

Table Conditions

359 Plant, material group

367 Country, plant, region, material

368 Country, region of delivering plant, region of ship-to party, customer tax classification, material tax
classification

Sales from Factories


Purpose
This process describes how the SAP system handles sales from factories, allowing for the creation of excise
invoices, which you have to send with each delivery that is subject to excise duty. There are two scenarios,
depending on whether you want to send the commercial invoice along with the delivery or at a later date.

Prerequisites
In order for the system to be able to copy the information from document to document, you must have set up the
copying control procedures in Customizing for Sales and Distribution (SD). This differs according to when you want
to send the commercial invoice:
• Along with the delivery

In this case, the document flow would be OR (standard sales order type) – LF (standard delivery type) –
F2 (invoice).

• At a later date

The document flow would be OR – JF (delivery type, a copy of LF) – JEX (pro forma billing document
type, a copy of document type F8) – F2.

In addition, you must also have maintained the settings in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes
on Goods Movements → India → Business Transactions → Outgoing Excise Invoices → Assign Billing Types to
Delivery Types.
Two sample pricing procedures are provided for this sales procedure, J1INFAC (condition-based excise
determination) and JFACT (formula-based excise determination).

Process Flow

The sales clerk creates a sales order, following the standard procedure.

There are special procedures for customers in possession of exemption forms.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 151 of 222

The shipping clerk creates a delivery, again, following the standard procedure.

On the initial screen, you set the appropriate delivery type (see above).

The warehouseman enters the goods issue.

The system only allows users to create a pro forma excise invoice if the delivery is complete, so as to
prevent them from creating multiple pro forma excise invoices.

What you do at this stage depends on whether you want to send the commercial invoice along with the
delivery or whether you want to invoice the customer later.

{ If the invoice is to be shipped with delivery, the shipping clerk:

i. Creates an invoice, following the standard procedure.

i. Creates an excise invoice from the invoice

{ If the invoice is to be sent on at a later date, the shipping clerk:

i. Creates the pro forma excise invoice

The pro forma excise invoice is only required for technical purposes and is not sent to the customer. The
system does not make any accounting postings at this stage.

v. Creates an excise invoice from the pro forma excise invoice

In both these cases, the system creates an accounting document to post the excise duty to a clearing
account.

Instead of creating excise invoices manually, you can also have the system create them automatically.
Alternatively, you can create them in batches.

You ship the goods.

When the time comes to invoice the customer, you create the invoice, following the standard
procedure.

Irrespective of the number of excise invoices that you have issued, you can combine the delivery items in
a single invoice (if the standard requirements are met).

Automatic Creation of Excise Invoices


Use
The system can automatically create an outgoing excise invoice for you immediately you post a commercial invoice
(or a pro forma invoice) for a customer sale. This function applies to excise invoices for sales from factories only.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 152 of 222

Activities
Customizing
Activate the function in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India →
Basic Settings → Maintain Excise Groups.
Specify which CENVAT accounts the system is to post the different types of excise duty to, in Customizing for
Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Business Transactions → Utilization →
Utilization Determination.
Specify which excise group and series group the excise invoices are to be created for, in Customizing for Logistics
– General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Business Transactions → Outgoing Excise
Invoices → Maintain Default Series Groups and Excise Groups.
Day-to-Day Activities
When you post an invoice, the system creates an excise invoice. All the information that it needs to create the
excise invoice is provided either by the invoice or by the Customizing settings that you have made. It also
determines the excise invoice type automatically.

Exemption Forms
Use
Some customers may be liable to excise duty at reduced rates or exempt from it altogether (for example,
customers abroad). Such businesses must provide you with a copy of their exemption forms in order to claim their
exemption.

Activities
If you make a sale to a customer that is in possession of an exemption form, you have to record the form number in
the sales order. The system then automatically applies the appropriate rate of excise duty.

When you create the sales order, enter the form, using the customer tax classification fields. Based on the
customer tax classification status, you can use different excise rates for a sale transaction.

If the form has not been submitted by the time you create the pro forma excise invoice, the excise value will be
recalculated at the normal rate.

See also:

Form Tracking

Export-Oriented Units
Use
Any sales that you make to export-oriented units (EOUs) require special treatment by the SAP System.

Prerequisites
You have maintained a zero-rate excise duty indicator for customers that qualify as 100% EOUs.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 153 of 222

Activities
When you come to create the excise invoice, the excise value is zero in the pro forma excise invoice document. No
excise duty is debited to the CENVAT account, and so no accounting entries are generated. However, the sale is
marked as a deemed export, and the system generates an outgoing excise invoice.

Even though the excise duty is zero, when you print the excise invoice, the system calculates the duty for the
purposes of printing.

Creation of Excise Invoices in Batches


Use
You use this report to create excise invoices for batches of invoices and batches of pro forma excise invoices,
instead of creating each one individually (see Sales from Factories). The excise invoices are then created in the
background.

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements →
Excise Invoice → For Sales Order → Batch Utilization.

Selection

On the selection screen, specify which billing documents (invoices or pro forma excise invoices) you want to create
excise invoices for.

Output

A list of commercial invoices and pro forma excise invoices appears, which you process as follows:

1. If you want to see how much credit is available on your CENVAT accounts – and if there is enough to cover
the excise duty that you will incur when you create the excise invoices – choose Account balances.

A dialog box appears with the following information:

{ The amounts under Balances are the amounts available on the CENVAT accounts.
{ The amounts under Utilization are the total amounts of the excise duties to be levied.
{ If the CENVAT accounts do not contain enough credits to cover the excise duties, the amount short is
shown under Deficit.

2. When you know which documents you want to process, select them and choose Batch utilization.

Printout of Excise Invoices


Use
You use this report to print outgoing excise invoices.

Prerequisites

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 154 of 222

You have:

z Customized the output for billing documents

You can do so in Customizing for Sales and Distribution (SD), by choosing Basic Functions →
Output Control → Output Determination → Output Determination Using Condition Technique → Maintain
Output Determination for Billing Documents.

You can use output type J1I0 and the SAPscript form J_1I_EXC_INVOICE. The driving program is
J_1IEXCP. The output determination has been set up for the billing document that is used as the excise
invoice reference.

z Maintained condition records for the output

You can do this in Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Master Data → Output → Billing Document →
Create. This ensures that output gets copied to all the excise reference documents.

Features

To access this function, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound
Movements → Excise Invoice → For Sales Order → Print.

Selection

On the selection screen, enter the numbers of the excise invoices. If any of these are reprints, select Incl. printed
excise inv.

Output

From the list of excise invoices, you have the following options:

z To display an excise invoice, select it and choose .


z To print an excise invoice, select it and choose .

Creating Pro Forma Excise Invoices


You create a pro forma excise invoice as you would create any other billing document, but in the Billing type
field, select Excise invoice.

Creating Excise Invoices


Use
This is the standard procedure that you follow to create an outgoing excise invoice. You create the excise invoice
from a reference document: either an invoice, a pro forma excise invoice, or a billing document.

Prerequisites
You have:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 155 of 222

z Customized the rounding-off indicator for sales transactions


z Specified which exchange rate type to use for export invoices

You make both of these settings in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods
Movements → India → Basic Settings → Maintain Company Codes.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Excise
Invoice → For Sales Order → Outgoing Excise Invoice Create/Change/Display → …

{ If you want to create the excise invoice with reference to a pro forma excise invoice or commercial
invoice, choose Excise Invoice → Create.
{ If you want to create the excise invoice with reference to a delivery note, choose Exc. inv. for
delivery → Create.

2. Enter the number of the reference document.

If you do not know the document number, you can search for it by choosing Due list.

3. Choose .

The excise invoice screen appears. The header data is displayed at the top; the line items, which the system
has copied from the reference document, are displayed at the bottom.

4. Enter header data as required.


5. To check if the utilization is done properly and the document is ready for posting, choose .
6. To enter texts for the excise invoice, choose .
7. To display the balances of the CENVAT accounts, choose Balances.
8. To display the utilization details, choose .
9. Save the excise invoice.

Excise Duty Utilization


Use
When you create an excise invoice, the system allows you to display the information about the excise duty,
including which CENVAT accounts the excise will be debited to. To access this function, choose .

If a company defaults in the fortnightly payment of CENVAT, the excise collectorate can enforce an immediate
payment of excise. Alternatively, you may have excess CENVAT credit and want to pay the duty immediately and
not wait for a fortnight. This is also the case for some export removals where you claim the refund from DGFTA, in
which case you need to pay the duty immediately.

Prerequisites
You can enable the immediate utilization of CENVAT, in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes
on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Maintain Series Groups.

Features

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 156 of 222

The information is shown in two group boxes:

z Excise details

This shows you the excise invoice type, which you can change if necessary by choosing . It also shows
you how much excise duty will be charged on the sale.

z Balance utilization

This shows you which CENVAT accounts the excise duty will be debited to.

The system automatically proposes which CENVAT accounts it is to debit the excise duty to. It first takes the
RG 23 accounts, and if there is not enough credit to cover it, it debits the remainder to the personal ledger
account (PLA). The cess component of excise can only be taken from the PLA.

If immediate utilization is active for a series group, you can change the default utilization proposal. You can decide
from which register to pay the amount. When you save the invoice, the system generates Part II entries in the
appropriate registers. These excise invoices are not listed further during fortnightly payment of CENVAT.

If immediate utilization is off for the series group, the system proposes the excise duty values directly in the RG
23A fields, but the postings are made to intermediate accounts for excise duty. The system does not create any
Part II entries. Entries are posted into a dispatch register. When you then run the fortnightly payment program, the
system picks up these invoices and allows payment of CENVAT.

For information about debiting the excise duty to a different company, see Intercompany Excise Duty Utilization

Excise Invoice Type


Use
The excise invoice type denotes whether the goods are for the domestic market, or if they are for export, whether
they are for export under bond, deemed export, or export under rebate. For more information about these
processes, see Excise Bonding.

Features
In the system, when you set the excise invoice type, it controls:
• How the excise duty is calculated
• Which ARE documents you process the export with

Activities
When you come to create an excise invoice for an export sale, if you need to change the excise invoice type, follow
this procedure:

Set the excise invoice type to Deemed, Bond, or No bond.

Choose Calculate Tax.

The system recalculates the excise duty according to the excise invoice type (see below). To do so, it
translates the assessable value into the local currency as at the excise invoice date. What happens next
depends on the excise invoice type:

{ Exports under bond

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 157 of 222

The system sets the excise duty to zero and generates an outgoing excise invoice. It does not generate any
entries for the Part II register.

The excise invoice is created with an export excise invoice number.

{ Deemed exports

The excise to be paid will be zero. This information will be used when the Part II registers are
downloaded.

When the system creates the excise invoice, it numbers it as a domestic excise invoice.

{ Nonbonded exports

The system applies the tax code defined in Customizing for Logistics – General, under Taxes on
Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Determination of Excise Duty → Maintain
Excise Defaults, and calculates the excise duty as normal.

Again, the excise invoice is created with an export excise invoice number.

Excise on Intercompany Billing Documents


Use
The SAP System allows you to create an excise invoice for intercompany billing documents.

For example, assume one company code places a sales order, and the goods are delivered to another. The first
company has to create an excise invoice, in this scenario, with reference to the intercompany billing document.

Canceling Excise Invoices


Use
You follow this procedure in order to cancel an outgoing excise invoice. It reverses any excise duty accounted for.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Excise JV → Create → Cancel exc. inv. or
Indirect Taxes → Sales and Outbound Movements → Excise Invoice Create/Change/Display → .
2. Enter the number, year, and series group of the excise invoice that you want to cancel.

A dialog box appears.

3. Choose Yes.
4. Save the adjustment posting.

Sales from Depots

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 158 of 222

Purpose
You may sell finished goods directly from the place of manufacture, as described under Sales from Factories, or
you may first ship them to a separate location for storage (a depot), from where you will sell them. The second
procedure is described here.

Sales from depots are handled differently from sales from factories because of excise law: Excise duty is payable
when you send the goods from the factory to the depot, but it is not levied again when you sell the goods.

Sometimes when you make a final sale of goods from a depot, price escalations could have happened with
retrospective effect. In such scenarios you need to pay the extra excise duty at the factory using an A Certificate.
You need to register the A certificate details in the RG 23D register and the excise recovered from the customer.

Prerequisites
You have customized:

z Stock transport processing, in Customizing for Materials Management (MM), by choosing Purchasing →
Purchase Order → Set Up Stock Transport Order
z The copying control for copying stock transport order NL to excise invoice JEX

Make this setting in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements →
India → Business Transactions → Outgoing Excise Invoices → Assign Billing Types to Delivery Types.

z The item category NLN (standard transport order) so that it is relevant for billing

You do this in Customizing for Sales and Distribution (SD), by choosing Sales → Sales Documents → Sales
Document Item.

Process Flow

1. You create the sales order, following the standard procedure.

The standard pricing procedures for depot sales are J1INDEP (condition-based excise determination) and
JDEPOT (formula-based excise determination).

2. You create the delivery, again, following the standard procedure.


3. You assign excise invoices to the delivery or material document.
4. You verify that you have selected the correct excise invoices and post them. Alternatively, if you have
selected the wrong excise invoices, you can cancel the assignment.
5. You create the invoice, following the standard procedure.

Creating Excise Invoices for Stock Transfers


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → For
Depot → Create/Change/Display.
2. In the Material document field, enter the goods receipt number and choose .

The system displays the information from the goods receipt, for example, the sending plant, the excise
registration, the range, the division, and the collectorate.

3. Choose Details.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 159 of 222

The system copies the items from the goods receipt document. In the depot it is possible to have a separate
excise invoice at line item level.

4. Enter the internal document number of the excise invoice sent by the factory.
5. Choose More documents to go the excise invoice details screen.
6. Enter the internal document number of the excise invoice from the factory.

The system copies the information to the line item (for example, the excise invoice number, the excise
invoice date, the item number , the chapter ID, the excise invoice quantity, the amount of excise duty paid,
the excise base value, and the serial number of the Part II register entry with which the excise was paid).

You can change the receipt quantity to match the actual quantity received at the depot, if necessary. The
system automatically adjusts the excise accordingly.

7. Go back to the item details screen.


8. Save the excise invoice.

The system creates an entry in register RG 23D.

Creating Excise Invoices for Direct Purchases


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → For
Depot → Create/Change/Display.
2. In the Material document field, enter the goods receipt number and choose .

The system displays the information from the goods receipt, for example, the sending plant, the excise
registration, the range, the division, and the collectorate.

You can also maintain the excise registration details for the ship-from party, as for with the vendor. The ship-
from can be different from the vendor code. (The delivering plant can be maintained as a ship-from in the
system. When a valid ship-from is entered, the excise registration details copied from the vendor will be
overwritten by the ship-from excise registration details.)

The ship-from registration details displayed can also be overwritten manually.

The dealer's commercial invoice number can be stored in the vendor excise invoice number, as in this case
the dealer himself will not have an excise invoice.

3. Choose Details.

The system copies the items from the goods receipt document. It also copies the vendor's excise invoice
number and the serial numbers of the entries in the RG 23A, RG 23C, and personal ledger account (PLA)
registers.

4. Enter the internal document number of the excise invoice sent by the factory.
5. Select an item and choose More documents to go the excise invoice details screen.

In the case of direct purchases, there will not be any excise invoice in the system, so leave the internal
document field blank. The vendor's invoice will show the details of the excise invoices through which excise
has been paid for the item that is being dispatched. You can enter these details here.

6. For each item, the chapter ID, excise base value, and excise duty amounts are defaulted from the purchase
order. You can change them if there is any difference. Enter the excise amount paid and the receipt
quantity. You also enter the Part II register serial numbers with which the excise duty was paid and the

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 160 of 222

excise registration information from the original excise invoice.


7. Go back to the item details screen.
8. Save the excise invoice.

The system creates an entry in register RG 23D. You can change the excise invoice as long as it has not
been used in any sales.

Creating Additional Excise Entries at Depots


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Procurement → Excise Invoice → For
Depot → Additional Excise Entry at Depot.
2. In the Internal exc. inv. no. field, enter the internal excise invoice number at the depot along with the year,
and choose .

The system displays the information from the excise invoice which has already been created at the depot,
including the excise group, vendor excise invoice number, ship from, and all the receipt against that excise
invoice, highlighting the RG 23D folio and serial numbers.

An excise invoice item can have multiple A certificates attached to it. The A certificates will have the same
folio number as the original line item, but the serial numbers will be different. A hierarchy icon differentiates
the additional lines for an item line.

3. You can maintain the A certificate number, date, and additional BED, AED ,SED and CESS for a given RG
23D Folio.
4. After entering an A certificate you cannot delete the A certificate from the system, but you can change it until
it is picked up during removals from the depot.
5. If some of the values in an A certificate are incorrect, you can make the values zero so that they do not have
an impact on the final excise value.
6. Once an A certificate is used for removals then it cannot be changed.
7. Save additional excise entry.

The system creates an entry in register RG 23D. Folio number generation must be active for you to make
use of this supplementary invoice functionality at depot.

Assigning Excise Invoices to a Delivery


Use
You follow this procedure to specify which excise invoices are to be assigned to a delivery from a depot (or other
material document).

You can also automate this procedure, using the batch selection program (J_1IJCHK), by making the
appropriate Customizing settings in the Country Version India (CIN) Implementation Guide (IMG).

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Excise
Invoice → For Depot → Create/Change/Display → Delivery or Material Document → RG 23D Selection.
2. Enter the delivery document number or the material number and choose .
3. Select the excise invoice you want.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 161 of 222

4. Choose .
5. Choose Excise invoice.

A list of excise invoices appears. These are the excise invoices at the depot with a balance quantity.

The system also shows a list of the A certificates that can be used. You can pick up any of the A certificates,
but they must be for the same excise invoice. You can only pick up an A certificate in its entirety. You cannot
select part of an A certificate.

6. Select the excise invoices that are relevant to the delivery.


7. Specify what quantity to be used from each excise invoice.

The system recalculates the excise accordingly.

8. Go back to the item details screen.


9. Save the data.

Result
The system creates an entry in register RG 23D and generates the depot excise invoice numbers.

If you selected any A certificates, the system also generates additional entries in the RG 23D register. The system
marks the original A certificates as updated, so that they cannot be used for any other removals.

Verifying and Posting Excise Invoices Assigned to


Delivery
Use
You follow this procedure to verify that the correct excise invoices have been assigned to a delivery. If everything is
correct, you can then post the delivery.

Prerequisites
You have selected which excise invoices are to be assigned to the delivery and have posted the goods issue.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Excise
Invoice → For Depot → Create/Change/Display → Delivery or Material Document → Verify/Post.
2. Enter the number of the delivery that you want to verify and choose .
3. Make sure that the information is correct.
4. Save the data.

The system updates the posting flag in the RG 23D register.

Other Outward Movements


Use
In the standard procedure for creating outgoing excise invoices (see Sales from Factories), the excise invoice is
created with reference to a delivery note or an invoice. The system also allows you to create an excise invoice with

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 162 of 222

reference to various other documents, as follows:


• Goods issue documents (for example, transfer postings)
• Vendor excise invoices (for when you return faulty goods to a vendor, for example)
• Factory excise invoice (for sales returns)
In addition, you can create an excise invoice without reference to any document at all.

Prerequisites
You have specified, per excise group, whether you want to create these excise invoices in one or two steps (see
below). You do so in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India →
Basic Settings → Maintain Excise Groups.
You have also specified the maximum number of items allowed per excise invoice, in Customizing for Logistics –
General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Maintain Excise Registrations.

Features
Depending on your Customizing settings, you create excise invoices in a single step or in two steps, as follows:
• In the two-step procedure, the excise clerk first creates the excise invoice, but no postings are made. An
excise supervisor then verifies that the invoice is correct and, if so, posts it.
• If the excise clerks are more experienced, you may want to use the one-step procedure, which is quicker,
but more prone to error.

In this case, when you create an excise invoice, the system automatically posts it in the background.

Note that the functions for creating and canceling these excise invoices are different from those for other excise
invoices.

Creating Excise Invoices


Use
This is the procedure that you follow to create an excise invoice for the less common types of goods movement.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Excise
Invoice → For Other Movements → Create/Change/Display → .
2. On the selection screen, enter data as required, including:

{ Reference group box

Specify which document you want to create the excise invoice for and which excise group it is for.

{ Details group box

Specify the vendor or customer that you are sending the invoice to.

3. Choose .

If you entered an internal document number, the system copies the item details from it.

4. Choose .
5. Enter line items for each of the materials to be included in the excise invoice. For each item, enter the

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 163 of 222

following data:

{ Material
{ Quantity
{ Unit of measure
{ Base value
{ Excise duty

6. To pick the rate and amount from a specific excise invoice, choose Get excise invoice.
7. Save the excise invoice.

If you are using the one-step procedure, the system creates and posts an excise invoice. Otherwise, the
system saves the information but does not make any postings: it now has to be verified.

Verifying and Posting Excise Invoices


Use
You follow this procedure to verify that the information in an excise invoice that has already been created, and to
post it once you are satisfied.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Excise
Invoice → For Other Movements → Post Excise Invoice.
2. Enter the internal document number of the excise invoice.
3. Choose Release to accounting.

The system displays the excise invoice. The excise duty that is to be posted is displayed at the foot of the
screen, which you can change if necessary.

4. To access the balance utilization, choose .


5. To display the balance available on the CENVAT accounts, choose Account Balances.
6. Save the excise invoice.

The system generates the accounting documents.

7. To print the excise invoice, choose .

Canceling Excise Invoices


1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Excise
Invoice → For Other Movements → Create/Change/Display → .
2. Enter the internal document number.
3. Choose .

A dialog box appears, asking you to confirm whether you want to delete the excise invoice.

4. Choose Yes.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 164 of 222

Creating Excise Invoices for Stock Transfers


Use
Follow this procedure to create an outgoing excise invoice for a stock transfer to another plant. For more
information about this function, see Other Outward Movements.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Excise
Invoice → For Other Movements → Create/Change/Display → .
2. On the selection screen, enter data as required, including:

{ Ref. doc. type: MATD (Material document)


{ Doc. number: Transfer posting number
{ Vendor: Leave this field blank
{ Customer: The customer account number of the receiving plant

3. Choose .

The system copies the details from the transfer posting.

4. For each item:

{ Enter the net assessable value


{ Check and change the excise duty rates

5. Save the excise invoice.

If you are using the one-step procedure, the system creates and posts the excise invoice. Otherwise, the
system saves the information but does not make any postings: it now has to be verified.

Making a Transfer Posting


Use
In this procedure, you make a transfer posting for the goods ordered by another plant. For more information about
this function, see Entering the Removal from Storage at the Issuing Plant.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Materials Management → Inventory
Management → Goods Movement → Transfer Posting.
2. Choose Movement type → Transfer posting → Plant to plant → To stock in transit.
3. Enter the number of the issuing plant and storage location.
4. Choose To purchase order.
5. In the dialog box, enter the number of the stock transport order that the receiving plant created and choose
.
6. Check the data.
7. Save the transfer posting.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 165 of 222

Exports Under Excise Regulations


Use
Manufacturing plants are entitled not to pay any basic excise duty on export sales, as long as the goods are
accompanied by an ARE document. The system handles AREs and the appropriate permit documents, such as
export bonds and deemed export licenses.
The system does not handle exports to Nepal and Bhutan, which are subject to separate legislation.

Features
The system allows you to process three types of exports:
• Exports under bond
• Exports under claim for rebate
• Deemed exports
You must create an ARE document for all goods that you export under these schemes. You use the same function
to process all ARE documents. For information about how to use the function in general, and which features are
common to all ARE documents, see ARE Documents.

Exports Under Bond


Use
One of the ways of exporting goods without paying basic excise duty is to obtain an excise bond from the excise
authorities and then fill out an ARE-1 document to go with every export.

Activities

Customizing

Carry out the IMG activities in Customizing for Logistics – General, under Tax on Goods Movements → India →
Business Transactions → Exports Under Excise Regulations → Exports and … → Printouts of ARE Documents.

Master Data

Enter your excise bonds in the system.

Day-to-Day Activities

In order to qualify for an exemption from excise duty, all exports must be accompanied by the appropriate
paperwork, including an ARE-1 document, and you must complete the export within the export period. To process
and track ARE-1s, use the ARE Documents functions, following the process described under ARE-1 Processing.

You can only issue an ARE-1 under a bond. The system automatically keeps track of the bond balance.

There are two ad-hoc reports that you can use for tracking bonds and ARE-1s: Bond Summary Report and Aging
Analysis for ARE Documents.

Reporting

There are two statutory reports that you prepare at least once a month, Pro Forma of Running Bond Account and
Statement Regarding Export of Excisable Goods.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 166 of 222

Excise Bond
Definition
A document that effectively licenses a manufacturing plant to remove goods from its premises without paying basic
excise duty, on condition that the goods are then exported.
An excise bond covers a fixed amount of excise duty. The excise duty of the goods exported under bond cannot
exceed the bond value.

In the system, the term "excise bond" also covers letters of undertaking, and all of the excise bond
functions apply equally to letters of undertaking, unless stated otherwise.

Use
Master Data
When you obtain a bond from the excise department, enter it in the system. The system numbers each bond
automatically.
Day-to-Day Activities
When you assign an ARE-1 to a bond, the system automatically warns you of any reservations that have already
been made against the bond.
The system keeps track of the bond balance for you. When you post an ARE-1, the bond balance decreases
automatically. In the case of running bonds, the balance increases again when you close the ARE-1.
Once an excise bond is no longer of any use to you, for example, if it expires or if you have exhausted a fixed
bond, you can close it. This prevents any users from using it afterwards.
Reporting
You can use the system to prepare two statutory reports, the Pro Forma of Running Bond Account and the
Statement Regarding Export of Excisable Goods. One further report, the Bond Summary Report, gives you an
overview of all of your bonds.

Bond Numbering
Use
When you create an excise bond, the system automatically assigns it an internal bond number.

Each bond also has an official bond number.

Activities

Customizing

Maintain the number range object for the internal bond number in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing
Tax on Goods Movements → India → Tools → Number Ranges.

Master Data

When you enter an excise bond, you enter the official bond number manually. When you save the bond, the

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 167 of 222

system automatically assigns it a new internal bond number.

Bond Balance
Use
Each excise bond only covers a limited amount of basic excise duty, the bond value. Every time you post an ARE-
1, the system reduces the bond balance automatically.

Features
Every time you post an ARE-1 under a fixed bond, the system debits the excise duty stated on the ARE-1 to the
bond, which reduces the bond balance. When the balance reaches zero, the bond is exhausted.

Running bonds, on the other hand, are automatically replenished: Once an export is complete and the excise
department sends you confirmation that the ARE-1 is correct, the system automatically credits the excise duty back
to the bond (but see also Fast Credit).

You can check the bond balance at any time in the bond master or the Bond Summary Report. If you want to check
the debits and credits on a running bond, use the Pro Forma of Running Bond Account.

Fast Credit
Use
When you close an ARE-1 covered by a running bond, the system credits the excise duty back to the bond
automatically.

However, some local excise departments may allow you to credit the excise duty back as soon as you receive the
countersigned ARE-1 back from the customs department. This procedure is known in the system as fast credit.

Activities

Customizing

If you have a fast credit agreement with its local excise department, enter this information in Customizing for
Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India → Business Transactions → Exports Under
Excise Regulations → Exports → Make Settings for ARE-1 Procedure.

Day-to-Day Activities

If you do not have a fast credit agreement, the system credits the excise duty to the running bond when you close
the ARE-1.

With fast credit, the system credits the excise duty back to the running bond when you enter the Arrived Back date
(see Updating ARE-1s).

Reservations
Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 168 of 222

The system records the total amount of excise duty from ARE-1s that you have created (but not yet posted) under
a given bond.
This reservation amount is for information only. It serves to warn you, when you create an ARE-1, that other clerks
have already created other ARE-1s under a bond and that they intend to post them under this bond as well.

Activities
When you create a new ARE-1 in the system, you specify which bond the ARE-1 is covered by. When you do so,
the system displays the bond's reservation amount.
If the reservation amount is already over the bond balance, you might want to use a different bond, if another one
is available. But since the reservation amount is for information only, the decision is up to you.

Processing Excise Bonds


To access the individual functions shown in the table, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes →
Master Data → Excise Bond.

Function Follow-on menu path What you should know

Create an excise bond → Create

Change an excise bond → Change

Display an excise bond → Display

Cancel an excise bond → Cancel You can only cancel a bond if you
have not yet used it.

Close an excise bond → Close You must have closed all of the
ARE-1s that the bond covers.

ARE-1 Processing
Purpose
This procedure describes how you process ARE-1s for exports under bond.

Prerequisites
You have an excise bond from the government and have entered it in the system.
You have received a sales order from a customer located abroad. In the system, you have already created the
delivery and the outgoing excise invoice. In the excise invoice, you have set the excise invoice type to Export
Under Bond.

Process Flow

The excise clerk creates an ARE-1.

He then calls the local excise department and asks them to send an excise officer to check the goods.

The excise officer comes and checks that the goods match what is on the ARE-1. He fills out Part A of
the form (Certification by the Central Excise Office).

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 169 of 222

The clerk then posts the ARE-1 and prints out the requisite number of copies.

The excise officer signs the ARE-1s and takes one copy with him.

The shipping department sends the goods to be exported, together with the excise invoice and the ARE-
1.

Before the goods can leave the country, they have to go through the customs office, for example, at the
airport or at the port.

When the goods arrive at customs, the customs officer checks whether the excise invoice and the ARE-1
match the goods.

If he finds that there are fewer goods than stated on the ARE-1, he enters the shortfall in the ARE-1.

He then fills out Part B of the ARE-1 (Certification by the Customs Officer) and sends it back to the
excise clerk. One of the copies is in a sealed envelope.

When the excise clerk receives the ARE-1, he updates the ARE-1 in the system.

He fills out the various certification dates in the ARE-1 (for example, the date when the ARE-1 arrived
back at your company).

If the customs officer noted a shortfall in the quantity of goods, the excise clerk enters the shortfall as
well. Since the whereabouts of the missing goods cannot be accounted for, they no longer qualify for
exemption from excise duty. Your company is therefore liable for the excise duty on the shortfall, plus
interest, backdated to the date when you removed the goods from your premises. The clerk specifies
which excise registers to pay the excise duty from.

The clerk sends the ARE-1 in the sealed envelope to the excise department.

The excise officer cross-checks this copy of the ARE-1 with his own copy. When he is satisfied that
everything is correct, he sends the excise clerk a final confirmation.

When the excise clerk receives the confirmation, he closes the ARE-1.

The process is now complete.

Creating ARE-1s
Use
You create an ARE-1 when you want to export goods under bond.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Create ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 170 of 222

a. Select Create ARE-1.


b. Select Outgoing Excise Invoice.
c. Enter the excise invoice that the ARE-1 is for and choose .
d. If the ARE-1 is to cover more than one excise invoice, repeat step (c) for each of them.

3. Assign an excise bond to the ARE-1.


4. On the Addresses tab, enter the addresses of your local excise department and the customs department
that will process the ARE-1.

Their addresses will be printed on the ARE-1. For more information, see Automatic Address Determination.

5. On the Additional Data tab, maintain any long texts required in the ARE-1.

This information will be printed on the ARE-1. For more information, see Long Texts.

6. On the Package Details tab, enter any relevant information about how the goods are packaged.

This information will also be printed on the ARE-1.

7. Save the ARE-1.

Result
The system:

z Creates the ARE-1 and assigns it an internal ARE-1 number (see ARE Document Numbering)
z Increases the bond's reservation amount
z Sets the document status to In Process

The next step you have to carry out in the system is to post the ARE-1. If you need to, you can still cancel the ARE-
1.

Changing ARE-1s
Use
Once you have created an ARE-1, you can still change the following information until you post it:

z Which excise bond it is assigned to


z Which excise invoices are assigned to it
z Which addresses are entered
z Any long texts
z Any package details

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Change ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Change.
b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 171 of 222

c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. Change data as required.


4. Save the ARE-1.

Assigning Excise Bonds to ARE-1s


Use
When you create an ARE-1, you must specify which bond covers it. You can change the bond until such time as
you post the ARE-1.

Prerequisites
You have obtained an excise bond from the excise department and you have entered in the system.

Procedure
1. On the Bond/UT-1 Detail tab, enter the number of the excise bond that you want to cover the ARE-1 and the
year in which it was issued.
2. Choose .

The system displays the bond details.

3. If you want to see which other ARE-1s the bond is already assigned to, choose .

Posting ARE-1s
Use
When you have created an ARE-1 and the excise officer has confirmed that all the details are correct, you can post
the ARE-1.

You can still make any changes that you need to before you post it.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Post ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Post.
b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and fiscal year and choose .

3. On the Certification Dates tab, enter the date and time that the goods are being dispatched.
4. Save the ARE-1.

Result

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 172 of 222

The system:

z Assigns the ARE-1 an official ARE-1 number (see ARE Document Numbering)
z Clears the excise duty from the bond's reservation amount and debits it to the bond (see Bond Balance)

You can no longer change the ARE-1. However, you can still reverse it, if need be. Otherwise, the next step is to
update it.

Updating ARE-1s
Use
When the goods arrive at customs, the customs officer checks them against the excise invoice and the ARE-1. If
there are any discrepancies in the quantity of the goods, he records them on the ARE-1. He also fills out Part B of
the ARE-1 (Certification by the Customs Officer) and sends you three copies of the ARE-1, one in a sealed
envelope.

When you receive the ARE-1, you update the dates in the ARE-1 in the system to match what the customs officer
has written on the ARE-1.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Update ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Update.
b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. On the Certification Dates tab, fill out the following dates as per the ARE-1:

{ Arrived at Customs
{ Countersigned by Customs
{ Arrived Back

4. Enter any shortfalls that the customs officer has noted on the ARE-1.
5. Save the ARE-1.

Result
If the bond is a running bond and you have activated the fast credit function, the system credits the excise duty
back to the running bond.

You must now send the ARE-1 to your local excise department.

Entering Shortfalls in ARE-1s


Use
If, for any reason, the customs officer finds that the quantities of the goods are lower than you have stated on the

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 173 of 222

excise invoice and the ARE-1, he amends the quantity on the ARE-1. You must then enter the shortfall in the ARE-
1.

Since the whereabouts of the missing goods cannot be accounted for, they no longer qualify for exemption from
excise duty. You must therefore pay the excise duty on the shortfall, plus interest, backdated to the date when you
removed the goods from your premises.

Procedure
1. Choose the line item that you want to adjust.
2. In the detail data, on the Quantities tab, enter the amended quantity, and choose .

The system displays the shortfall in the Differential Qty field.

It calculates the interest due and displays it on the Utilization tab in the Interest Amount field.

3. On the Utilization tab, specify whether you want to pay the excise duty from register RG 23A, register RG
23C, or your PLA.
4. On the Document Details tab, enter the reason for the shortfall in the Reason Code field.

Result
When you save the ARE-1, the system:

z Generates a Part II entry in the registers that you have specified (see Excise Registers)
z Creates an accounting document to debit the excise duty to the CENVAT reversal account and credit it to
the appropriate register accounts as follows (assuming, for example, that you want to pay the excise duty
and interest from Register RG 23A and the PLA):

z Credits this excise duty back to the bond (see Bond Balance)

Reversing ARE-1s
Use
When you have posted an ARE-1, you can reverse it if necessary until such time as customs has countersigned it.

By reversing an ARE-1, you forego the exemption from paying the excise duty that was due on the materials when
you removed them from your premises. Consequently, you must pay the excise duty plus interest (see Interest
Calculation).

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Reverse ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 174 of 222

a. Select Reverse ARE-1.


b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. On the Utilization tab, specify which excise registers you want to pay the excise duty and the interest from.

You can divide the amount payable between the different registers as you wish.

4. On the Document Details tab, enter the reason for reversing the ARE-1.
5. Save the ARE-1.

Result
The system:

z Generates a Part II entry in the registers that you have specified (see Excise Registers)
z Creates an accounting document to debit the excise duty to the CENVAT reversal account and credit it to
the appropriate register accounts as follows (assuming, for example, that you want to pay the excise duty
and interest from Register RG 23A and the PLA):

z Credits this amount of excise duty back to the bond (see Bond Balance)

You can no longer change the ARE-1.

Sending ARE-1s to Excise Departments


Use
Once the customs officer has returned the ARE-1 to you, you send it to the excise department so that they can
cross-check it against their original ARE-1.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Update ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Update ARE-1.


b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. On the Certification Dates tab, fill out the Sent to Excise Dept field.
4. Save the ARE-1.

Result

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 175 of 222

The next step is to close the ARE-1.

Closing ARE-1s
Use
When the excise department sends you confirmation that the ARE-1 is correct, you record the date in the system.
This closes the ARE-1.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Update ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Update ARE-1.


b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. On the Certification Dates tab, fill out the Export Confirmed field.
4. Save the ARE-1.

Result
If the bond is a running bond, the system also credits the excise duty back to the bond, if it has not already done so
(see Bond Balance).

The ARE-1 is now complete.

Pro Forma of Running Bond Account


Use
You use this report to prepare the statutory pro forma of running bond account, to be submitted monthly. It shows
the following details for a single running bond:

z Its opening balance


z All of the ARE-1s that it has covered
z The duty debited from it when you posted the ARE-1s and the duty credited back to it once you closed the
ARE-1s
z The bond's current balance

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements →
Exports Under Excise Regulations → Reports → Pro Forma of Running Bond Account.

Statement Regarding Export of Excisable Goods


Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 176 of 222

You use this report to prepare the statutory statement regarding export of excisable goods, to be submitted at least
once a month to your local excise department. The report prints out the complete statement in a format acceptable
to the excise departments.

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements →
Exports Under Excise Regulations → Reports → Statement Regarding Export of Excisable Goods.

Selection

On the selection screen, specify which parts of the statement you want to prepare as follows:

Part Shows

I All stock removals without payment of duty

II All removals from previous quarters for which you have not yet received a confirmation of receipt from
the customs office

III All stock removals that will exceed the export period by the end of the month

IV All removals that you have reversed

V A list of your bonds with their balances

Bond Summary Report


Use
You use this report to prepare a list of all your excise bonds. The list shows the basic information about each
excise bond, and you can drill down to see which ARE-1s the bond has been assigned to.

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements →
Exports Under Excise Regulations → Reports → Bond Summary.

Selection

Fill out the selection screen with the data for the bonds that you want to display.

Output

The system displays a list of the bonds that meet the selection criteria. To see which ARE-1s a bond has covered,
choose .

Exports Under Claim for Rebate

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 177 of 222

Use
If you have not obtained an excise bond, you must pay any excise duty liable when removing goods from your
premises for export. However, you can claim a rebate for the excise duty once you have completed the export if
you fill out an ARE-1 to go with the export.

Activities

Customizing

Carry out the IMG activities in Customizing for Logistics – General, under Tax on Goods Movements → India →
Business Transactions → Exports Under Excise Regulations → Exports and … → Printouts of ARE-Documents.

Day-to-Day Activities

In order to qualify for a rebate on the excise duty, all exports must be accompanied by the appropriate paperwork,
including an ARE-1 document, and you must complete the export within the export period. To process and track
these documents, use the ARE Documents functions, following the process described under ARE-1 Processing.

There is an ad-hoc report that you can use for tracking ARE-1s, Aging Analysis for ARE Documents.

ARE-1 Processing
Purpose
This procedure describes how you process ARE-1s for exports under claim for rebate.

Prerequisites
You have received a sales order from a customer located abroad. In the system, you have already created the
delivery and the outgoing excise invoice. In the excise invoice, you have set the excise invoice type to Export
Under Claim for Rebate.

Process Flow

The excise clerk creates an ARE-1.

He then calls the local excise department and asks them to send an excise officer to check the goods.

The excise officer comes and checks that the goods match what is on the ARE-1. He fills out Part A of
the form (Certification by the Central Excise Office).

The clerk then posts the ARE-1 and prints out the requisite number of copies.

The excise officer signs the ARE-1s and takes one copy with him.

The shipping department sends the goods to be exported, together with the excise invoice and the ARE-
1.

Before the goods can leave the country, they have to go through the customs office, for example, at the
airport or at the port.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 178 of 222

When the goods arrive at customs, the customs officer checks whether the excise invoice and the ARE-1
match the goods.

If he finds that there are fewer goods than stated on the ARE-1, he enters the shortfall in the ARE-1.

He then fills out Part B of the ARE-1 (Certification by the Customs Officer) and sends it back to the
excise clerk. One of the copies is in a sealed envelope.

When the excise clerk receives the ARE-1, he updates the ARE-1 in the system.

He fills out the various certification dates in the ARE-1 (for example, the date when the ARE-1 arrived
back at your company).

If the customs officer noted a shortfall in the quantity of goods, the excise clerk enters the shortfall as
well. Later, when you come to claim the rebate, you will not be able to claim back the excise duty on the
shortfall.

The clerk sends the ARE-1 in the sealed envelope to the excise department.

The excise officer cross-checks this copy of the ARE-1 with his own copy. When he is satisfied that
everything is correct, he sends the excise clerk a final confirmation.

When the excise clerk receives the confirmation, he closes the ARE-1.

The ARE-1 is now complete and you can apply for the rebate on the excise duty that you have paid.

Creating ARE-1s
Use
You create an ARE-1 when you want to export goods under claim for rebate.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Create ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Create ARE-1.


b. Select Outgoing Excise Invoice.
c. Enter the excise invoice that the ARE-1 is for and choose .
d. If the ARE-1 is to cover more than one excise invoice, repeat step (c) for each of them.

3. On the Addresses tab, enter the addresses of your local excise department and the customs department
that will process the ARE-1.

Their addresses will be printed on the ARE-1. For more information, see Automatic Address Determination.

1. On the Additional Data tab, maintain any long texts required in the ARE-1.

This information will be printed on the ARE-1. For more information, see Long Texts.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 179 of 222

2. On the Package Details tab, enter any relevant information about how the goods are packaged.

This information will also be printed on the ARE-1.

3. Save the ARE-1.

Result
The system:

z Creates the ARE-1 and assigns it an internal ARE-1 number (see ARE Document Numbering)
z Sets the document status to In Process

The next step you have to carry out in the system is to post the ARE-1. If you need to, you can still cancel the ARE-
1.

Changing ARE-1s
Use
Once you have created an ARE-1, you can still change the following information until you post it:

z Which excise invoices are assigned to it


z Which addresses are entered
z Any long texts
z Any package details

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Change ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Change.
b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. Change data as required.


4. Save the ARE-1.

Posting ARE-1s
Use
When you have created an ARE-1 and the excise officer has confirmed that all the details are correct, you can post
the ARE-1.

You can still make any changes that you need to before you post it.

Procedure

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 180 of 222

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Post ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Post.
b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. On the Certification Dates tab, enter the date and time that the goods are being dispatched.
4. Save the ARE-1.

Result
The system assigns the ARE-1 an official ARE-1 number (see ARE Document Numbering).

You can no longer change the ARE-1. However, you can still reverse it, if need be. Otherwise, the next step is to
update it.

Updating ARE-1s
Use
When the goods arrive at customs, the customs officer checks them against the excise invoice and the ARE-1. If
there are any discrepancies in the quantity of the goods, he records them on the ARE-1. He also fills out Part B of
the ARE-1 (Certification by the Customs Officer) and sends you three copies of the ARE-1, one in a sealed
envelope.

When you receive the ARE-1, you update the dates in the ARE-1 in the system to match what the customs officer
has written on the ARE-1.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Update ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Update.
b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. On the Certification Dates tab, fill out the following dates as per the ARE-1:

{ Arrived at Customs
{ Countersigned by Customs
{ Arrived Back

4. Enter any shortfalls that the customs officer has noted on the ARE-1.
5. Save the ARE-1.

Result
You must now send the ARE-1 to your local excise department.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 181 of 222

Entering Shortfalls in ARE-1s


Use
If, for any reason, the customs officer finds that the quantities of the goods are lower than you have stated on the
excise invoice and the ARE-1, he amends the quantity on the ARE-1. You must then enter the shortfall in the ARE-
1.

Later, when you come to claim the rebate, you will not be able to claim back the excise duty on the shortfall.

Procedure
1. Choose the line item that you want to adjust.
2. In the detail data, on the Quantities tab, enter the amended quantity, and choose .

The system displays the shortfall in the Differential Qty field.

3. On the Document Details tab, enter the reason for the shortfall in the Reason Code field.

Reversing ARE-1s
Use
When you have posted an ARE-1, you can reverse it if necessary until such time as customs has countersigned it.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Reverse ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Reverse ARE-1.


b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. On the Document Details tab, enter the reason for reversing the ARE-1.
4. Save the ARE-1.

Result
You can no longer change the ARE-1.

Closing ARE-1s
Use
When the excise department sends you confirmation that the ARE-1 is correct, you record the date in the system.
This closes the ARE-1.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 182 of 222

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Central Processing → Update ARE-1.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Update ARE-1.


b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-1 number and choose .

3. On the Certification Dates tab, fill out the Export Confirmed field.
4. Save the ARE-1.

Result
The ARE-1 is now complete.

Deemed Exports
Use
You can ship deemed exports to any customers in possession of a deemed export license without paying any basic
excise duty, but only if the goods are accompanied by an ARE-3 document.

Activities

Customizing

Carry out the IMG activities in Customizing for Logistics – General, under Tax on Goods Movements → India →
Business Transactions → Exports Under Excise Regulations → Deemed Exports and … → Printouts of ARE
Documents.

Master Data

Enter your customers' deemed export licenses in the system.

Day-to-Day Activities

In order to qualify for an exemption from excise duty, all deemed exports must be accompanied by the appropriate
paperwork, including an ARE-3 document, and you must complete the deemed export within the rewarehousing
period. To process and track ARE-3s, use the ARE Documents functions, following the process described under
ARE-3 Processing.

You can only issue an ARE-3 with reference to a customer's license. The system automatically keeps track of the
license balance.

There are two ad-hoc reports that you can use for tracking licenses and ARE-3s: Deemed Export License
Summary and Aging Analysis for ARE Documents.

Deemed Export License

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 183 of 222

Definition
A license issued by the excise authorities under which an exporter can procure goods from a manufacturer without
payment of basic excise duty.

The license is not a blanket exemption. It only applies to purchases of specific quantity or value of specific goods
from a specific vendor, for example, 20 personal computers from Computer World Pvt. Ltd.

Use

Master Data

When your customers obtain a deemed export license from the excise authorities, they send you a copy. You enter
your customers' licenses in the system; the system numbers each license automatically.

If, later on, a customer gets an extension on the expiry date of the license from the excise authorities, you can
enter it there as well. When a license is exhausted, you close it.

Day-to-Day Activities

When you sell a customer some goods that are covered by a license, you create an ARE-3 to go with the goods
shipment. In the ARE-3, you specify which license the goods are covered by. The system reduces the license
balance accordingly.

When the license balance is exhausted, you can close it.

Reporting

You can keep track of your customers' licenses using the Excise Bonding License Summary.

License Numbering
Use
When you create a deemed export license, the system automatically assigns it an internal license number.

Each license also has an official license number.

Activities

Customizing

Maintain the number range object for the internal license number in Customizing for Logistics – General, by
choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India → Tools → Number Ranges.

Master Data

When you enter a license, you enter the official license number manually. When you save the license, the system
automatically assigns it an internal license number.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 184 of 222

License Balances
Use
Each deemed export license only covers a limited quantity of goods or goods to a limited value, depending on its
quantification method.
Every time you post an ARE-3 against a license, the remaining quantity or value decreases automatically. The
system thus keeps track of the license balances for you.

Features
The excise authorities issue several different license types with different quantification methods. When you define
the license types in the system (see Customizing below), you specify which quantification method each uses.

Activities
Customizing
Define the license types in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India →
Business Transactions → Exports Under Excise Regulations → Deemed Exports → Maintain License Types.
Master Data
When you enter a license in the system, you specify the license type and the quantity or value of the goods
covered.
The license type controls which quantification method applies to the license.
Day-to-Day Activities
When you post an ARE-3, the system automatically debits the value or quantity of the goods stated in the ARE-3 to
the license. The license balance decreases accordingly.
If you reverse an ARE-3, the license balance does not go back up.
You can check the license balances at any time in the license master or in the Deemed Export License Summary.

License Validity
Use
Deemed export licenses are only valid for a limited period of time. The system ensures that you can only use
licenses if they are valid, and allows you to extend their validity period if required.

Activities

Master Data

When you enter a license, you enter the validity period as stated on the original document.

If a license expires and the excise authorities grant your customer an extension on the validity period, enter the
extension date in the license master. Note that this field only appears once the license expires.

Otherwise, you close the license.

Day-to-Day Activities

The system will not allow you to assign an invalid license to an ARE-3.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 185 of 222

Processing Deemed Export Licenses


To access the individual functions shown in the table, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes →
Master Data → Deemed Export License.

Function Follow-on menu path What you should know

Create a license → Create The system assigns the license an internal license
number and sets the license status to Active.

Change a license → Change You can only change a license if you have not already
assigned it to an ARE-3.

Display a license → Display

Cancel a license → Cancel You can only cancel a license if you have not yet used it.

The system sets the status to Canceled.

Close a license → Close Close a license when all of the ARE-3s that it has
covered are closed.

The system sets the status to Closed.

ARE-3 Processing
Purpose
This procedure describes how you process ARE-3s for deemed exports.

Prerequisites
Your customer has supplied you with a copy of its deemed export license and you have entered the license in the
system.
You have received a sales order from the customer for goods covered by this license. In the system, you have
already created the delivery and the outgoing excise invoice. In the excise invoice, you have set the excise invoice
type to Deemed Exports.

Process Flow

The export clerk creates an ARE-3 and, when he is ready, posts it.

He also prints out the ARE-3 and encloses a copy with the delivery.

The shipping department sends the goods to the customer, together with the excise invoice and the ARE-
3.

When the customer's warehouseman receives the goods, he checks whether the excise invoice and the
ARE-3 match the goods.

If he finds that there are fewer goods than stated on the ARE-3, he enters the shortfall in the ARE-3.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 186 of 222

He then fills out Part 2 of the ARE-3 (Certificate of Warehousing by the Consignee) and sends it back to
the excise clerk.

When the excise clerk receives the ARE-3, he updates the ARE-3 in the system.

He fills out the various certification dates in the ARE-3 (for example, the date when the ARE-3 arrived
back at your company).

If the warehouseman noted a shortfall in the quantity of goods, the excise clerk enters the shortfall as
well. Since the whereabouts of the missing goods cannot be accounted for, they no longer qualify for
exemption from basic excise duty. You must therefore pay the excise duty on the shortfall, plus interest,
backdated to the date when you removed the goods from your premises. The clerk specifies which excise
registers to pay the excise duty from.

The process is now complete.

Creating ARE-3s
Use
You create an ARE-3 when you want to send a customer a deemed export.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Deemed Exports → Central Processing → Create ARE-3.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Create ARE-3


b. Select Outgoing Excise Invoice.
c. Enter the excise invoice that the ARE-3 is for and choose .
d. If the ARE-3 is to cover more than one excise invoice, repeat step (c) for each of them.

3. Assign the deemed export license to the ARE-3.


4. On the Addresses tab, enter the address of your local excise department.

Its address will be printed on the ARE-3. For more information, see Automatic Address Determination.

5. On the Additional Data tab, maintain any long texts required in the ARE-3.

This information will be printed on the ARE-3. For more information, see Long Texts.

6. On the Package Details tab, enter any relevant information about how the goods are packaged.

This information will also be printed on the ARE-3.

7. Save the ARE-3.

Result
The system creates the ARE-3 and assigns it an internal ARE-3 number (see ARE Document Numbering).

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 187 of 222

Changing ARE-3s
Use
Once you have created an ARE-3, you can still change the following information until you post it:

z Which export licenses are assigned to the line items


z Which excise invoices are assigned to it
z Which addresses are entered
z Any long texts
z Any package details

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Deemed Exports → Central Processing → Change ARE-3.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Change.
b. Select ARE-3 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-3 number and choose .

3. Change data as required.


4. Save the ARE-3.

Assigning Deemed Export Licenses to Line Items


Use
When you create an ARE-3, assign the line items the deemed export license that covers them.

Procedure
1. In the item overview, select the line item that you want to assign the export license to.
2. On the License tab in the detail data, enter the internal license number and year.

Posting ARE-3s
Use
When you have created an ARE-3 and you are ready to ship the goods, you can post and print the ARE-3.

You can still make any changes that you need to before you post it.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Deemed Exports → Central Processing → Post ARE-3.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 188 of 222

2. In the top line:

a. Select Post.
b. Select ARE-3 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-3 number and choose .

3. On the Certification Dates tab, enter the time that the date and time that the goods are being dispatched.
4. Save the document.

Result
The system:

z Assigns the ARE-3 an official ARE-3 number (see ARE Document Numbering)
z Deducts the quantity or value of the goods from the license (see License Balances)

You can no longer change the ARE-3. However, you can still reverse it, if need be. Otherwise, the next step is to
update it.

Updating ARE-3s
Use
When the goods arrive at the customer’s premises, the customer checks them against the excise invoice and the
ARE-3. If there are any shortfalls in the quantity of the goods he records them on the ARE-3. The customer also
fills out Part 2 of the ARE-3 (Certification of Warehousing by the Consignee) and sends you a copy.

When you receive the ARE-3, you update the ARE-3 in the system to match what the customer has written on the
ARE-3.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Deemed Exports → Central Processing → Update ARE-3.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Update.
b. Select ARE-3 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-3 number and choose .

3. On the Certification Dates tab:

{ Enter the Countersigned by Customer date as per the ARE-3.


{ Enter the Arrived Back date.

4. Enter any shortfalls that the customer has noted on the ARE-3.
5. Save the ARE-3.

Result
The ARE-3 is now complete.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 189 of 222

Entering Shortfalls in ARE-3s


Use
If, for any reason, your customer finds that the quantities of the goods are lower than you have stated on the excise
invoice and the ARE-3, he enters the shortfall on the ARE-3. You must then enter the shortfall in the ARE-3.

Since the whereabouts of the missing goods cannot be accounted for, they no longer qualify for exemption from
excise duty. You must therefore pay the excise duty on the shortfall, plus interest, backdated to the date when you
removed the goods from your premises.

Procedure
1. Choose the line item that you want to adjust.
2. In the detail data, on the Quantities tab, enter the amended quantity, and choose .

The system displays the shortfall in the Differential Qty field.

It calculates the interest due and displays it on the Utilization tab in the Interest Amount field.

3. On the Utilization tab, specify whether you want to pay the excise duty from register RG 23A, register RG
23C, or your PLA.
4. On the Document Details tab, enter the reason for the quantity change in the Reason Code field.

Result
When you save the ARE-3, the system:

z Generates a Part II entry in the registers that you have specified (see Excise Registers)
z Creates an accounting document to debit the excise duty to the CENVAT reversal account and credit it to
the appropriate register accounts as follows (assuming, for example, that you want to pay the excise duty
and interest from Register RG 23A and the PLA):

Reversing ARE-3s
Use
When you have posted an ARE-3, you can reverse it if necessary until such time as you enter the rewarehousing
date.

By reversing an ARE-3, you forego the exemption from paying the excise duty that was due on the materials when
you removed them from your premises. Consequently, you must pay the excise duty plus interest (see Interest
Calculation).

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 190 of 222

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Deemed Exports → Central Processing → Reverse ARE-3.
2. In the top line:

a. Select Reverse ARE-3.


b. Select ARE-3 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE-3 number and choose .

3. On the Utilization tab, specify which excise registers you want to pay the excise duty and the interest from.

You can divide the amount payable between the different registers as you wish.

4. On the Document Details tab, enter the reason for reversing the ARE-3.
5. Save the document.

Result
The system:

z Generates a Part II entry in the registers that you have specified (see Excise Registers)
z Creates an accounting document to debit the excise duty to the CENVAT reversal account and credit it to
the appropriate register accounts as follows (assuming, for example, that you want to pay the excise duty
and the interest from Register RG 23A and the PLA):

z Does not reinstate the value or quantity of the goods to the license

You can no longer change the ARE-3.

Deemed Export License Summary


Use
You use this report to prepare a summary of the deemed export licenses that you have entered in your system.

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements →
Excise Bonding → Reports → Deemed Export License Summary.

Selection

Enter selection criteria as required. If you want to see which ARE-3s the licenses have been used for, select
Display ARE-3s Referred To.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 191 of 222

Output

For each license, the list shows the header data, the materials covered by the license, and the license balance.

If you selected Display ARE-3s Referred To, the list also shows the ARE-3s assigned to each license. If the list
shows an ARE-3 without an official ARE-3 number, that means that the ARE-3 has only been created and not yet
posted.

ARE Documents
Use
This function is for use by excise clerks and excise supervisors, so that they can create and process ARE-1s and
ARE-3s used to execute exports and deemed exports.

The following documentation describes the functions common to all types of exports under excise regulations. For
information about the individual procedures involved, see Exports Under Bond, Exports Under Claim for Rebate,
and Deemed Exports.

To access the ARE Documents function, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes →
Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports Under Excise Regulations → …. There are several different transactions
under this menu path. For more information about the different transactions available, see Transaction
Configuration.

Integration
This function allows you to create ARE documents using outgoing excise invoices as a reference document, which
in turn you create on the basis of deliveries. As such it is integrated with Sales and Distribution (SD) and Materials
Management (MM).

Any entries that the system makes in relation to an ARE document, in Part II of the excise registers RG 23 A and
C, are also shown in the transaction. It is thus integrated with Financial Accounting (FI).

Features
The screen consists of the following areas:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 192 of 222

Top Line

This is where you specify what document you want to process. When you create an ARE document, you specify
the reference document in this area. When you process an ARE document that you have already created, you
enter the ARE document number.

Header Data

This area consists of four tabs, each with information that relates to the whole of the excise document.

Tab Use

Document Details Basic header data, such as the internal and official ARE numbers and the document
status.

Total Duties Total amounts of basic excise duty in the ARE document and any changes made by
customs (ARE-1s) or the customer (ARE-3s)

Certification Dates Various dates used to track the progress of the ARE document.

Bond/UT-1 Detail In exports under bond, shows which bond the export is covered by.

This tab is only shown for exports under bond.

Excise Invoice The excise invoices that the ARE document covers.
Summary

Addresses Shows the addresses of the local excise department and the customs office that is
handling the ARE document.

Additional Data Fields for any additional information that you might want to enter, including various long
texts to be printed on the ARE document.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 193 of 222

Part II Any entries in Part II of the excise registers RG 23A, RG 23C, or PLA made as a result of
your updating the quantities in the ARE document.

Note that this tab is not displayed if there are no Part II entries.

Item Overview

This area lists all of the items in the excise invoice. To process an item, you click the item number and process it in
the detail data , but you process the items in the detail data area.

Detail Data

This area consists of seven tabs, each with information about a particular item.

Tab Use

Item Basic information about the material itself.

Quantities Information the quantity of goods in the excise invoice, and how much of this quantity
have entries in Parts I and II of the excise registers.

Duty Rates The rates of excise duty on the item.

Duty Values The excise duty on the item, and how much of it has already been credited to the
CENVAT accounts.

License The license that this item is covered by (deemed exports only).

Package Details Any information about the packages that needs to be printed on the ARE document.

Reference The other SAP documents associated with the item.


Documents

Additional Data Fields for any additional information that you might want to enter, this time at item level.

Transaction Configuration
Use
You can execute the ARE Documents function using different transaction codes. Each transaction code controls
how users can process ARE documents and which reference documents they can use.

Features
The standard system comes with one central processing transaction and three individual processing transactions
for each type of ARE document:
• The central processing transactions allow users to carry out all functions on the ARE document and are
suited to a system administrator, for example.
• The individual processing transactions restrict the users to specific processing modes only (for example,
creating and displaying ARE documents, or updating and displaying ARE documents).

You can assign these transactions to excise clerks or supervisors.

For a list of the transaction codes provided, see Transaction Codes.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 194 of 222

Activities
Customizing
If the delivered settings do not meet your requirements, you can change them in Customizing for Logistics –
General, by choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India → Business Transactions → Exports Under Excise
Regulations → Transaction Configuration.

ARE Document Numbering


Use
In the system, each ARE document has two numbers: an internal number, which is the number that the system
uses to identify the ARE document, and an official number, which corresponds to the serial numbers assigned to
you by the excise department for the ARE document forms.

Activities
Customizing
To activate internal numbering, maintain the number range object J_1IINTNUM in Customizing for Logistics –
General, by choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India → Tools → Number Ranges.
To activate official numbering, maintain the number range object J_1IARE1 for ARE-1s, and J_1IARE3 for ARE-3s.
Create a separate number range for each series group.
Day-to-Day Activities
When you create an ARE document, the system automatically assigns it an internal document number. The
system only assigns the ARE document an official number when you post it. Both numbers are displayed on the
Doc. Details tab.
You cannot change either of the numbers manually.

Automatic Address Determination


Use
When you print ARE documents, they must show the address of your local excise department and the customs
department that will be handling the export.

Activities

Customizing

Enter the name and address of every excise department and customs department that you have dealings with in
Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India → Master Data → Maintain
Postal Addresses.

Define a default local excise department address for each series group, in Customizing for Logistics – General, by
choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India → Master Data → Maintain Series Groups.

Day-to-Day Activities

When you create an ARE document, the system automatically enters the address of the local excise department
that you have assigned to the series group. The address data is shown on the Addresses tab.

You can change it if you want to.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 195 of 222

Long Texts
Use
The forms that ARE-1s and ARE-3s are printed on contain spaces for various pieces of information, for example,
the mode of transport or the export seal number. When you create an ARE document, you can enter this
information using the long text function and it will be printed at the appropriate positions.

Activities

Customizing

Country Version India comes with long texts already customized to go with the ARE-1 and ARE-3 forms. However,
if you need to, you can define other long texts in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on Goods
Movements → India → Tools → Long Texts.

Day-to-Day Activities

When you create an ARE document and you want to enter a long text for it, on the Additional Data tab, choose
Long Text.

In the dialog box, double-click the sort of long text that you want to enter, and type the text in the field next to it.

When you print out the document, the texts appear at the appropriate positions.

Printouts of ARE Documents


Use
You can print out ARE-1s or ARE-3s on blank A4 paper. The system prints out the entire form with the details filled
in from the ARE that you have created. Since multiple copies are required of each ARE document, the system
automatically prints out the number of copies needed.

Features
Country Version India comes with all the settings you need to print out ARE-1s and ARE-3s in the appropriate
format. Two SAPscript forms are provided, one for ARE-1s and one for ARE-3s. These forms use the same
printing program and output type. The output type is J1IB.

Activities

Customizing

Check the output type settings provided in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on Goods
Movements → India → Business Transactions → Excise Bonding → Exports Under Excise Regulations →
Printouts of ARE Documents.

Assign the output type to the ARE-1s and ARE-3s, in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on
Goods Movements → India → Business Transactions → Excise Bonding → Exports Under Excise Regulations →
Make Settings for ARE-1 Procedure and … → Deemed Exports → Make Settings for ARE-3 Procedure.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 196 of 222

In the same activities, specify how many copies of each ARE document you want the system to print.

Day-to-Day Activities

There are two ways of printing a document, as follows:

z When you post an ARE, select Print ARE Document on the Document Details tab.

Then, when you save the ARE, the system prints out the number of copies that you have specified.

z When you display an ARE, choose .

Note that this function is only available in display mode.

Export Periods and Rewarehousing Periods


Use
Exports under bond must be completed within the export period defined by the excise authorities, otherwise you no
longer qualify for the exemption on the basic excise duty. Exports under claim for rebate must also be completed
within this time or you will not be able to reclaim the duty. Similarly, deemed exports must also be completed within
the allotted rewarehousing period.

The system keeps track of these periods for you automatically.

Activities

Customizing

Enter the export period in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on Goods Movements → India →
Business Transactions → Exports Under Excise Regulations → Exports.

Enter the rewarehousing period in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on Goods Movements →
India → Business Transactions → Exports Under Excise Regulations → Deemed Exports.

Day-to-Day Activities

If an ARE-1 or ARE-3 reaches the end of the period without being closed, you can apply to the excise department
for an extension.

z If the extension is granted, enter the extension date in the ARE document (see Extending Export Periods
and Rewarehousing Periods).
z If not, you must repay the excise duty that you posted to the CENVAT account for the goods. To do so,
reverse the ARE-1 or reverse the ARE-3.

You can track which AREs are coming to the end of their export or rewarehousing periods using the Aging Analysis
for ARE Documents.

Extending Export Periods and Rewarehousing Periods

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 197 of 222

Use
If you have not closed an ARE document within the prescribed export period or rewarehousing period and you
have obtained an extension from the excise department, you can enter the new date in the document.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports or Deemed Exports → Central Processing → Update ARE-1 or
Update ARE-3.
2. In the top line:
a. Select Update.
b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document or ARE-3 Internal Document.
c. Enter the internal ARE document number and choose .
3. On the Certification Dates tab, fill out the Extended Until field.

This field only appears once an ARE document exceeds the export period or rewarehousing period.

4. Save the document.

Result
Once you have entered the extension date, you can continue processing the ARE document as normal.

Interest Calculation
Use
Whenever you have to pay the excise duty originally exempted by an ARE document, you also have to pay interest
on that amount, backdated to the date on which you removed the goods from your premises.

The system calculates the amount of interest due automatically.

Features
Interest is due whenever you reverse an ARE document (for example, when an ARE-1 exceeds the export period
and the excise authorities do not grant you an extension).

It is also due when a customs officer updates the quantity of goods on the ARE-1, or a customer updates the
quantity of goods on an ARE-3.

The applicable interest rates are announced by the excise authorities.

Activities

Customizing

Maintain the interest rates in Customizing for Logistics – General, by choosing Tax on Goods Movements →
India → Business Transactions → Exports Under Excise Regulations → Exports → Make Settings for ARE-1
Procedure and … → Deemed Exports → Make Settings for ARE-3 Procedure.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 198 of 222

Day-to-Day Activities

The system automatically calculates interest when:

z You enter shortfalls in ARE-1s or enter shortfalls in ARE-3s


z You reverse an ARE-1 or reverse an ARE-3

You can overwrite the excise duty and interest that the system proposes.

Adding Excise Invoices to AREs


Use
If you have already created an ARE document, you can still add additional excises to it until such time as you post
it.

Procedure
1. On the Excise Invoice Summary tab, enter the excise invoice number and year in the Additional Excise
Invoices field.
2. Choose .

Removing Excise Invoices from AREs


Use
If you have assigned an excise invoice to an ARE document and you wish to remove it, you can do so until such
time as you have posted it.

Procedure
1. On the Excise Invoice Summary tab, enter the excise invoice number and year in the Additional Excise
Invoices field.
2. Choose .

Canceling AREs
Use
If you have already created an ARE document but not yet posted it, you can cancel it if you need to.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements → Exports
Under Excise Regulations → Exports or Deemed Exports → Central Processing → Cancel ARE-1 or
Cancel ARE-3.
2. In the top line:
a. Select Cancel.
b. Select ARE-1 Internal Document or ARE-3 Internal Document.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 199 of 222

c. Enter the internal ARE number and choose .


3. Save the document.

Aging Analysis for ARE Documents


Use
You use this report to prepare a list of all ARE documents by their status. It allows you to see which documents
need to be processed within a certain amount of time, for example, which ARE-1s are approaching the end of their
export period and need to be extended.

Features

To access the report, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Sales/Outbound Movements →
Exports Under Excise Regulations → Reports → Aging Analysis for ARE Documents.

Selection

1. Enter data as follows:


a. In the Documents field, enter the status of the documents that you want to see.
b. Then either enter a date range or enter a period.

The period can refer to the next so many days, or the past so many days, depending on what status you
have selected.

2. Choose .

Output

Each document is assigned a status as follows:

z : Activity is overdue
z : Activity is due today
z : Activity has been completed

The list is formatted using the SAP List Viewer: see this documentation for more information about navigating
and formatting options within the list.

Transaction Codes
Transaction Function

J1IA101 Create, change, update, cancel, display ARE-1

J1IA102 Create, change, display ARE-1

J1IA103 Update, display ARE-1

J1IA104 Cancel, display ARE-1

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 200 of 222

J1IA301 Create, change, update, cancel, display ARE-3

J1IA302 Create, change, display ARE-3

J1IA303 Update, display ARE-3

J1IA304 Cancel, display ARE-3

J1IBN01 Create bond

J1IBN02 Change bond

J1IBN03 Display bond

J1IBN04 Cancel bond

J1IBN05 Close bond

J1ILIC01 Create license

J1ILIC02 Change license

J1ILIC03 Display license

J1ILIC04 Cancel license

J1ILIC05 Close license

J1IANX18 Pro Forma of Running Bond Account

J1IANX19 Statement Regarding Export of Excisable Goods

J1IARE_AGE Aging Analysis for ARE Documents

J1IBONSUM Bond Summary Report

J1ILICSUM License Summary Report

Form Tracking
Use
You use this function to record and monitor forms relating to tax concessions. You can record the forms that your
customers send you against their sales orders, and those that you send to your vendors against your purchase
orders.

You can also use these functions for monitoring other routine activities, for example, when you transfer money to
your personal ledger account (PLA) using a TR6 challan.

Features
Forms for concessional sales tax must be submitted by the buyer after the goods have been delivered or after it
has paid the invoice. In the case of interstate concessional sales tax rate sales, the concessional rate is granted
against the issue of C-forms.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 201 of 222

Exemption from excise duty may be granted by the excise authorities under certain circumstances, for example,
on exports or deemed exports. In such cases, the buyer has to produce certain statutory forms to claim
concessional rates of excise duty or exemptions. The exporter has to provide the vendor with proof of export (form
AR3A).

If the buyer is unable to furnish the certificate at the appropriate time, material supply should be at the normal rate
of sales tax or excise duty.

Activities

To access the form tracking function, from the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Forms
Tracking → Create/Change/Display.

CENVAT Adjustment Postings


Use
You use these functions if you need to make an adjustment posting to any of your CENVAT accounts. You can
make adjustment postings to account for:

z Scrap
z Materials that you have not used in production
z Additional excise paid by vendors
z Money that you have transferred to your personal ledger account
z Other transactions

You can also use this function to cancel excise invoices.

Features
Each of the different types of adjustment postings are documented separately. However, they all work on the same
principle, as follows.

Reference Document

On the initial screen of the transaction, you specify the reference document, that is, the document which the
adjustment posting is to refer to – either an internal document, such as a material document or a subcontracting
challan – or an external document, such as an incoming excise invoice.

You also specify which registers are affected by the posting. In many cases, the adjustment will have to be remitted
to the authorities on a fortnightly basis. The adjustment will then be included when you run the Remittance of
Excise Duty Fortnightly report. If the adjustment has to be remitted immediately, you specify which register is
affected.

Excise Details

When you proceed to the detail screen, the system automatically shows the line items from the reference
document, if it is an internal document. You specify how much excise duty is to be adjusted and which CENVAT
accounts the adjustment posting is to be made to.

When you edit the excise details, there are a number of functions that are available, depending on the type of
adjustment posting:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 202 of 222

z Assigning excise invoice to line items


z Specifying which G/L accounts are to be adjusted
z Displaying balances of CENVAT accounts

When you save your changes, the system creates an accounting document to make the appropriate postings.

Making Adjustment Postings for Scrap


Use
You follow this procedure if you have scrapped a material and want to reverse the excise duty debited to your
CENVAT account.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Excise JV → Create → Matl write-off.
2. Enter data as required, including:

{ Document number

Enter the number of the document that you used to scrap the material.

{ CENVAT account selection group box

Specify which account is affected by the adjustment posting is for. If the posting does not have to be
remitted immediately, select Fortnightly payment.

3. Choose .

The system displays the information from the material document.

4. Adjust the posting date as necessary.


5. Adjust the excise duty for each line item either:

{ Manually
{ By assigning the line item to an excise invoice

6. Specify which G/L accounts are to be posted to.


7. Save the adjustment posting.

Making Adjustment Postings for Materials Not Used in


Production
Use
You follow this procedure if you have not used a material in the production process and want to reverse the excise
duty debited to your CENVAT account.

Procedure

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 203 of 222

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Excise JV → Create → Matl non-prod.
2. Enter data as required, including:

{ Document number

Enter the number of the material document that the adjustment posting is to refer to.

{ CENVAT account selection group box

Specify which account is affected by the adjustment posting is for. If the posting does not have to be
remitted immediately, select Fortnightly payment.

3. Choose .

The system displays the information from the material document.

4. Adjust the posting date as necessary.


5. Adjust the excise duty for each line item either:

{ Manually
{ By assigning the line item to an excise invoice

6. Specify which G/L accounts are to be posted to.


7. Save the adjustment posting.

Making Adjustment Postings for Additional Excise Paid


by Vendors
Use
You follow this procedure if a vendor has increased the amount of excise duty that it originally charged you and
you want to debit the difference to your CENVAT account.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Excise JV → Create → Additional excise.
2. Enter data as required.

In the Document number field, enter then number of the document sent to you by the vendor.

3. Choose .
4. Adjust the posting date as necessary.
5. Enter the amount of excise duty in either of the following ways:

{ To enter line items for different materials and the excise duty accordingly, choose and enter the
line items in the table.
{ To enter the excise duty only, choose and enter the excise duty in the totals fields at the foot of
the screen.

6. If the duty qualifies as countervailing duty (CVD):

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 204 of 222

a. Select CVD applicable.


b. Enter the CVD amount in the BED amount field.

7. Specify which G/L accounts are to be posted to.


8. Save the adjustment posting.

Making Adjustment Postings for Money Transferred to


PLA
Use
You follow this procedure to make an adjustment posting when you transfer money to your personal ledger account
(PLA).

Prerequisites
You have already transferred the money to your PLA at the bank, using a TR6 challan, and have posted the
corresponding accounting document.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Excise JV → Create → TR6 challan.
2. Enter data as required, including the document number.

You can enter either the challan number or the number of the accounting document.

3. Choose .

If you entered the accounting document number, the system displays the information from it.

4. Enter the amounts against the accounts that you require.


5. Save the adjustment posting.

Making Adjustment Postings for Other Transactions


Use
You follow this procedure if you want to make an adjustment posting that does not fall into any of the other
categories of adjustment offered by this function. You can only use an external document as your reference
document.

Procedure

1. From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Indirect Taxes → Excise JV → Create → Other adj.
2. Enter data as required, including:

{ Document number

Enter the number of the external document that you want to refer to.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 205 of 222

{ CENVAT account selection group box

Specify which account is affected by the adjustment posting is for. If the posting does not have to be
remitted immediately, select Fortnightly payment.

3. Choose .

The system displays the information from the material document.

4. Adjust the posting date as necessary.


5. Enter the amount of excise duty in either of the following ways:

{ To enter line items for different materials and the excise duty accordingly, choose and enter the
line items in the table.
{ To enter the excise duty only, choose and enter the excise duty in the totals fields at the foot of
the screen.

6. Specify which G/L accounts are to be posted to.


7. Save the adjustment posting.

Assigning Excise Invoices to Line Items


Use
When you make an adjustment posting, you follow this procedure if you want to specify the original excise invoice
associated with a line item.

Procedure
1. Select the line item that you want and choose Get excise invoice.

The system displays a list of all the excise invoices that you have posted from this vendor for this particular
material.

2. Select the excise invoice that you want and choose .

The system:

{ Enters the excise invoice document number in the Ref. doc. field (Reference document).
{ Calculates how much of the excise duty from the excise invoice should be apportioned to the line
item and enters it in the excise duty fields.

If you then overwrite these amounts, you should also overwrite the reference document number with
an explanatory text, since there is no point in maintaining the link to the reference document
anymore.

You have a line item with ten plates of glass that you have broken and are to be scrapped. You have

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 206 of 222

three excise invoices from the same vendor to choose from. You pick one for 20 plates of glass with
BED at INR 200. The system automatically apportions INR 100 to the line item that is to be reversed.

Specifying Which CENVAT Accounts to Adjust


Use
When you make an adjustment posting, you have to specify which CENVAT accounts are to be adjusted.

Prerequisites
You have specified whether you want the users to be able to add extra debit accounts (see below), in Customizing
for Logistics – General, by choosing Taxes on Goods Movements → India → Basic Settings → Maintain Company
Codes.

Procedure
1. Choose Determine G/L accounts.

A dialog box appears that shows how much will be posted to which G/L accounts. The accounts that are
displayed depend on the excise group and the CENVAT account that you entered on the selection screen.

2. Add another account, if you need to, and adjust the other postings so that the credits and debits match.
3. Enter a business area and cost center, if necessary.
4. To close the dialog box, choose .

Displaying CENVAT Account Balances


To display the balances of your CENVAT accounts, choose Balances.

The system displays the balances only of the CENVAT accounts that are affected by your G/L postings.

Treasury and Risk Management – India (TRM)


Purpose
In India, you are required to calculate and post withholding tax during the borrowings operations in
TRM.

In SAP ECC you use the Treasury and Risk Management solution to withhold this tax automatically.

The TRM withholding tax function for India is available for product types:

z Money market
z Securities

The performance of one of these functions has as result that the tax transaction is part of TRM
transactions.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 207 of 222

In the case of a tax rate change, the new tax rate is considered for the withholding tax calculation.

Integration
Prerequisite for the TRM withholding tax customizing is a complete extended withholding tax
customizing in Financial Accounting.

The specific functions for India are integrated into the Financial Accounting process and calculate the
withholding tax before posting the tax to the corresponding customer account.

For more information about the Customizing settings in FI see Extended Withholding Tax.

Features
Customizing

You must carry out the Customizing settings for extended withholding tax.

You carry out the customizing actions to generate withholding tax in TRM with the maintenance view
TRXV_WT_ASSIGN.

You can use this view to control for which flows withholding tax is calculated and posted. You can
assign flows only to certain product types, financial transaction types, business partners, securities
accounts, securities account groups or portfolios.

For more information, see Overview.

In addition you must carry out the settings as described in Customizing.

Business Transactions

You record money market and securities transactions following the standard procedure.

The system automatically calculates withholding tax for India when you save the transaction.

If, for example, the interest rate has changed during settlement, the system recalculates withholding tax.

Reporting

You can prepare your report and print it: you use for this the cash flow reporting program.

Constraints
This component is not used for areas:

• CML (Loans)

• Micro-hedging for recording the underlyings for foreign exchange (forex) contracts

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 208 of 222

Customizing
Implementation Consideration
To customize Treasury and Risk Management for use in India you carry out the generic Customizing activities for
withholding tax using the information provided in the following.
Additionally, you carry out the Customizing activities that relate to functions used only in India.
Settings
You must maintain every update type in the Update Type Tax Base column of the maintenance view, which should
generate a withholding tax flow.
You create this withholding tax flow with a flow type maintained in the Update Type column.
Since it is very important to correctly maintain this table, we recommend that you read the F1 Help of the fields of
this maintenance view.

Business Transactions
Use
You record money market and securities transactions following the standard procedure.
In addition, when you save this transaction, the system automatically calculates withholding tax.
During settlement, the system recalculates withholding tax.

Calculating Withholding Tax and Posting in TRM


Purpose
You can use this process to execute withholding tax calculation with the standard procedure and by posting the tax
relevant flows to customer for the corresponding business partner.
The calculation and posting of withholding tax in TRM is possible for product types Money Market (using the
transaction for creating fixed-term deposit) and Securities (using the transaction for creating security transactions).

Prerequisites
The withholding tax calculation is dependent on the withholding tax type and the withholding tax code which are
defined in the Financial Accounting Global Settings, customized under topic Extended Withholding Tax.
To calculate withholding tax in TRM, the flow types for which withholding tax should be calculated and posted must
be defined in the customizing table TRXV_WT_ASSIGN.
For every item in this table the withholding tax type and the withholding tax code have to be defined.

Result
The withholding tax flow is now calculated, posted and is part of the TRM transaction.

Withholding Tax Calculation in Contracts


Use
If you want to perform a withholding tax calculation and post it in Treasury and Risk Management you
post tax-relevant flows.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 209 of 222

The operator posts the tax-relevant flows involving the customer account for the corresponding business
partner.

Procedure
In the contract you define the flow types for which withholding tax must be calculated and posted.
You assign a contract to a customer using the Control Data indicator on the Payment details tab page in the
contract. Only then the system calculates and posts the withholding tax.
Maintain the fields “Business Place” and “Section Code” in a contract. In TRM, both fields can be maintained in the
box “Position indicator” of a transaction. To access this transaction on the SAP Easy Access screen choose Create
fixed-term deposit → Environment → Posting Indicator.

Result
You have calculated the withholding tax and saved it in the database.

Contract Processing
Use
The business place and section code fields are used for the withholding tax process in India.
In TRM, you can enter data for both fields in the Position Indicator of a transaction.
On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Environment → Posting Indicator.
The integration to Financial Accounting guarantees that the values of these fields are also transferred to FI and are
then part of the FI accounting document.

Example
The mapping of registration data, reporting, payment and due dates are based on these fields.

Calculating Withholding Tax on Interest Accruals


Use
This function enables you to define the posting on accruals and deferrals of expenses and revenues in Treasury.
To perform these functions, you use the corresponding transaction. On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose for
Money Market → Accounting → Financial Supply Chain Management → Treasury and Risk Management →
Transaction Manager → Money Market → Accounting → Accrual/Deferral.
Choose for Securities, instead: Accounting → Financial Supply Chain Management → Treasury and Risk
Management → Transaction Manager → Securities → Accounting → Interest Accrual/Deferral.
For more information about processing of interest accruals, see Accrual/Deferral.
For the TRM India withholding tax function only the difference procedure is possible as an accrual/deferral
procedure.

Prerequisites
To generate a withholding tax flow for an accrual, it is necessary to maintain the accrual update type in the
corresponding Customizing table.

Features
This program makes accruals or deferrals of expenses and revenues resulting from Treasury deals, and allocates
revenue and expenditure items to the proper account periods.
This program performs the following functions:
z Calculates the amount to be accrued or deferred for the flows concerned
z Creates the corresponding accrual or deferral flows
z Posts the items immediately in financial accounting, if required.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 210 of 222

Calculating Withholding Tax Calculation for Brokerage


Amounts
Use
If withholding tax is raised on brokerage you can create brokerage flows on tab page Other flows of the transaction
for brokerage amounts.
To generate withholding tax for a brokerage flow, you must maintain the brokerage update type, in the Update
Type Tax Base column of the Customizing view..

Example
You can use the following update type:
z SE3001: Brokerage capitalized

Treasury: Post Flows


Use
You use this report to check and control the postings and transferring transactions you have carried out.

Posting and Transferring of Flows


Use
You use this function to generate documents to Financial Accounting in Treasury.
This is possible with transaction Settle Fixed-Term Deposit and Program Treasury: Post Flows.

Features
The report performs following activities:
1. The program finds the corresponding posting details for each flow in account determination.
2. The document is prepared and transferred to Financial Accounting.
3. The calculated withholding tax amounts or flows are processed, transferred to Financial Accounting, and
posted in a single FI document.
4. The list output displays the selected transactions with the withholding taxes calculated.

Activities
You can use the test run to check whether these steps can be carried out correctly, without Financial Accounting to
be updated.
After a test run and during a productive run instead, the withholding tax information is stored in the contract,
transferred to Financial Accounting, and posted in a single FI document.

Roles
The following documents describe the roles delivered with Country Version India (CIN). For more information about
roles in general, see Creating Activity Groups ("activity group" is the old term for "role").

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 211 of 222

India Localization
Technical name: SAP_CIN

Tasks
This role covers all of the tasks associated with Country Version India (CIN), including Customizing, day-to-day
operations, and reporting.

This is the role that all the menu paths given in this documentation are based on.

CIN Customizing and Master Data Maintenance


Technical name: SAP_CIN_SUPER_USER

Tasks
This role covers all the Customizing activities relating to Country Version India (CIN), in all applications. It also
covers the maintenance of excise master data.

Excise Manager (Materials Management)


Technical name: SAP_CIN_MM_MANAGER

Tasks
This role covers all administrative tasks in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to excise duty in the areas of
procurement and subcontracting. It includes Customizing activities; all day-to-day operations; and reporting.

Activities in Materials Management (MM)

In Customizing and master data, the Excise Manager is authorized to:

z Work with the CIN Implementation Guide (IMG)


z Use the health check tool
z Define number ranges for excise invoices
z Maintain excise master data
z Make retrospective price amendments

In your day-to-day operations, this role allows you to:

z Capture, change, display, post, and cancel incoming excise invoices


z Capture excise invoices at depots
z Complete subcontracting challans and perform quantity reconciliation
z Post excise invoice journal vouchers
z Track forms

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 212 of 222

Activities in Financial Accounting (FI)

The Excise Manager can:

z Create the excise registers


z Transfer outstanding CENVAT credit on capital goods to the appropriate CENVAT accounts

Excise Supervisor (Materials Management)


Technical name: SAP_CIN_MM_SUPERVISOR

Tasks
This role covers most of the tasks in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to excise duty in the areas of
procurement and subcontracting. It includes all day-to-day operations and reporting, but only one Customizing
activity.

Activities in Materials Management (MM)

In Customizing and master data, the Excise Supervisor is authorized to:

z Define number ranges for excise invoices


z Maintain excise master data
z Make retrospective price amendments

In your day-to-day operations, this role allows you to:

z Capture, change, display, post, and cancel incoming excise invoices


z Capture excise invoices at depots
z Execute all activities relating to subcontracting challans
z Post excise invoice journal vouchers
z Track forms

Activities in Financial Accounting (FI)

The Excise Supervisor can:

z Create the excise registers


z Transfer outstanding CENVAT credit on capital goods to the appropriate CENVAT accounts

Excise Clerk (Materials Management)


Technical name: SAP_CIN_MM_CLERK

Tasks
This role covers the tasks relating to capturing incoming excise invoices.

Activities in Materials Management (MM)

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 213 of 222

The Excise Clerk can:

z Capture excise invoices (of all types)


z Track forms

Excise Manager (Sales and Distribution)


Technical name: SAP_CIN_SD_MANAGER

Tasks
This role covers the administrative tasks in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to excise duty in the area of
sales. It includes all Customizing activities; day-to-day operations; and reporting.

Activities in Sales and Distribution (SD)

In Customizing and master data, the Excise Manager is authorized to:

z Work with the CIN Implementation Guide (IMG)


z Use the health check tool
z Maintain excise master data
z Make retrospective price amendments

In your day-to-day operations, this role allows you to:

z Create and verify outgoing excise invoices for other movements


z Create excise invoices in batches
z Post excise journal vouchers
z Print excise invoices
z Track forms

In reporting, this role also allows you to:

z Remit excise duty using the fortnightly utilization program


z Print 57AE returns

Excise Supervisor (Sales and Distribution)


Technical name: SAP_CIN_SD_SUPERVISOR

Tasks
This role covers the tasks in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to excise duty in the sales area. It includes the
maintenance of master data; day-to-day operations; and reporting. It does not, however, include Customizing.

Activities in Sales and Distribution (SD)

In master data, the Excise Supervisor is authorized to:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 214 of 222

z Maintain excise master data


z Make retrospective price amendments

In your day-to-day operations, this role allows you to:

z Create and verify outgoing excise invoices for other movements


z Create excise invoices in batches
z Post excise journal vouchers
z Print excise invoices
z Track forms

In reporting, this role also allows you to:

z Remit excise duty using the fortnightly utilization program


z Print 57AE returns

Excise Clerk (Sales and Distribution)


Technical name: SAP_CIN_SD_CLERK

Tasks
This role covers the tasks relating to the creation of excise invoices.

Activities in Sales and Distribution (SD)

The Excise Clerk can:

z Create excise invoices for other movements


z Print excise invoices
z Track forms

Subcontracting Clerk
Technical name: SAP_CIN_SUBCONTRACTING_CLERK

Tasks
The Subcontracting Clerk is authorized to create, change, and display subcontracting challans.

Bonding Clerk
Technical name: SAP_CIN_BONDING_CLERK

Tasks
This role covers all tasks relating to exports under excise regulations.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 215 of 222

Activities in Materials Management (MM)

The Bonding Clerk can:

z Create, change, display, and cancel excise bonds and deemed export licenses
z Create, change, update, display, and cancel ARE documents
z Execute all the associated reports

TDS Manager
Technical name: SAP_CIN_TDS_MANAGER

Tasks
This role covers all the activities in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to tax deducted at source (TDS). It
includes all Customizing activities, day-to-day operations, and reporting.

Activities in Financial Accounting (FI)

In Customizing, the TDS Manager is authorized to:

z Work with the CIN Implementation Guide (IMG)


z Use the health check tool

In day-to-day operations, you can:

z Carry out all the activities relating to the remittance of tax withholdings
z Make adjustment postings
z Print and cancel TDS certificates for vendors
z Post and clear withholding tax on clearing accounts (Extended Withholding Tax only)
z Print TDS certificates for customers

In reporting, the TDS Manager can:

z Prepare annual returns for TDS (Classic TDS and Extended Withholding Tax)
z Prepare MIS report (Extended Withholding Tax)

TDS Supervisor
Technical name: SAP_CIN_TDS_SUPERVISOR

Tasks
This role covers the administrative activities in Country Version India (CIN) that relate to tax deducted at source
(TDS). It includes all day-to-day operations and reporting, but not Customizing.

Activities in Financial Accounting (FI)

In day-to-day operations, the TDS Supervisor can:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 216 of 222

z Carry out all the activities relating to the remittance of tax withholdings
z Make adjustment postings
z Print and cancel TDS certificates for vendors
z Post and clear withholding tax on clearing accounts (extended withholding tax only)
z Print TDS certificates for customers

In reporting, you can:

z Prepare annual returns for TDS (Classic TDS and Extended Withholding Tax)
z Prepare MIS report (Extended Withholding Tax)
z Archive TDS documents

TDS Clerk
Technical name: SAP_CIN_TDS_CLERK

Tasks
This role covers the day-to-day operations relating to tax deducted at source (TDS).

Activities in Financial Accounting (FI)

The TDS Clerk can:

z Carry out all the activities relating to the remittance of tax withholdings (Classic TDS and extended
withholding tax)
z Post and clear withholding tax on clearing accounts (extended withholding tax only)

Register Maintenance Clerk


Technical name: SAP_CIN_REGISTER_CLERK

Tasks
This role covers all the activities relating to the preparation of excise and sales tax registers.

Data Archiving
Purpose
This component archives the data in tables pertaining to Country Version India. For generic information on data
archiving, see Overview of the Archiving Workbench.

Implementation Considerations
You must archive the standard tables before archiving the Country Version India tables. Archiving of Country
Version India related data may lead to an inconsistency in the system, if the standard tables are not archived.

Features
• The data archiving tool for Country Version India:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 217 of 222

{ Writes the data to be archived into info catalogs.

{ Deletes the data from the active database.

{ Reads and displays the data in the info catalogs

● The data archiving tool archives all the Country Version India data for the excise group for a period.
● The data archiving tool for Country Version India archives the following tables:

Country Version India Archiving Tables

Table Name Description


J_1IEXCHDR Excise invoice header detail
J_1IEXCDTL Excise invoice line item details
J_1IGRXREF Goods Receipt to Excise Invoice Cross
Reference
J_1IPART1 Excise Part I details
J_1IPART2 Excise Part II details
J_1IRG23D RG23D register for the depot
J_1IRGSUM RG23 Summary of receipts and issues
J_1IRG1 Excise RG1 details
J_2IEXTRCT Extract table
J_2IEXDATE Extract table
J_2IREGBAL Balance table
J_2IRG1BAL Balance table
J_2IACCBAL Balance table

● The data archiving tool for Country Version India consists of the following archiving objects:

{ J_1I_EXDC

Archiving object for the excise document data and transaction data relevant to the excise documents

{ J_1I_P1GRX

Archiving object for Part1 registers and corresponding entries from J_1IGRXREF table

{ J_1I_RG23D

Archiving object for the RG23D register for the depot

{ J_1I_RG1

Archiving object for the finished goods

{ J_1I_EXBL

Archiving object for the Extract and Balance tables

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 218 of 222

Archiving Objects
Definition
The archiving objects write the data to be archived into the info catalogs and deletes the data from the active
database.

Use
You have to call the archiving objects in a particular sequence. Each archiving object archives data in certain table
(s).

Structure
The sequence in which you have to call the archiving objects is:

J_1I_EXDC

This archiving object archives the following tables:

{ J_1IEXCHDR

{ J_1IEXCDTL

{ J_1IPART2

{ J_1IGRXSUB

The selection criteria for this archiving object are:

○ Excise Group

○ Year

J_1I_RG1

This archiving object archives the following tables:

{ J_1IRG1

The selection criteria for this archiving object are:

○ Excise Group

○ Serial Year

J_1I_P1GRX

This archiving object archives the following tables:

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 219 of 222

{ J_1IPART1

{ J_1IGRXREF

The selection criteria for this archiving object are:

○ Excise Group

○ Register Type

○ Serial Year

J_1I_RG23D

This archiving object archives the following tables:

○ J_1IRG23D

The selection criteria for this archiving object are:

○ Excise Group

○ Document Year

J_1IEXBL

This archiving object archives the following tables:

○ J_2IEXTRCT

○ J_2IEXDATE

○ J_2IREGBAL

○ J_2IRG1BAL

○ J_2IACCBAL

The selection criterion for this archiving object is:

○ Excise Group

Archiving the Data


Use

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 220 of 222

This procedure lists down the steps required for:


• Writing the data into the info catalogs.
• Deleting the data from the active database.

Procedure
To write the data into the info catalogs, execute the following steps:

Execute transaction SARA.

Enter the archiving object name.

Select the Write option.

Maintain the Variant for the archiving object.

Select the Variant that you have maintained.

Maintain the Start Date.

Maintain the Spool Parameters.

Select the Execute icon .

The system schedules a new archiving job.

Select the Job Overview icon to get the overview of scheduled archiving jobs.

To delete the archived data from the active database, execute the following steps:

Execute transaction SARA.

Enter the archiving object name.

Select the Delete option.

Select the Archive Selection option

The Archive Administration: Select Files for Delete Program dialog box appears.

Select the file(s) to be deleted.

Maintain the Start Date.

Maintain the Spool Parameters.

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 221 of 222

Select the Execute icon .

Select the Job Overview icon to get the overview of scheduled archiving jobs.

Execute transaction SARI .

Select the archiving structure and the corresponding info catalog.

Select the Execute icon .

Check the data that is archived.

Result
The system writes the data into the info catalogs and deletes the data from the active database.

Transaction Codes for India


Transaction Action

J1I2 Prepare a sales tax register

J1I3 Create outgoing excise invoices in batches

J1I5 Update the RG 1 and Part I registers

J1IEX Incoming Excise Invoices (central transaction)

J1IEX_C Capture an incoming excise invoice (excise clerk)

J1IEX_P Post an incoming excise invoice (excise supervisor)

J1IF01 Create a subcontracting challan

J1IF11 Change a subcontracting challan

J1IF12 Display a subcontracting challan

J1IF13 Complete, reverse, or recredit a subcontracting challan

J1IFQ Reconcile quantities for subcontracting challans

J1IFR List subcontracting challans

J1IH Make a CENVAT adjustment posting

J1IIN Create an outgoing excise invoice

J1IJ Assign excise invoices to a delivery for sales from depots

J1INJV Adjust withholding tax Item

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008
India Page 222 of 222

J1INREP Reprint a withholding tax certificate for a vendor

J1IQ Year-End Income Tax Depreciation Report

J1IR Download register data

J1IS Process an excise invoice (outgoing) for other movements

J1IU Process exemption forms

J1IW Verify and post an incoming excise invoice

J1IX Create an incoming excise invoice (without reference to purchase order)

J2I8 Transfer excise duty to CENVAT account

J2IU Remit excise duty fortnightly

J2I9 Monthly CENVAT return

J1IG Excise invoice entry at depot

J1IGA Create additional excise entry at depot

J2I5 Extract data for excise registers

J2I6 Print excise registers

file://C:\WINDOWS\Temp\~hhD464.htm 5/18/2008

You might also like